FPX UserManual - IO Expansion PDF
FPX UserManual - IO Expansion PDF
FPX UserManual - IO Expansion PDF
Safety Precautions
Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents.
To ensure that you use this product correctly, read this User’s Manual thoroughly before use.
Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safety.
This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger.
WARNING
If critical situations that could lead to user’s death or serious injury is assumed by
mishandling of the product.
-Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system, so that the whole system
remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor.
-Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas. It could lead to an explosion.
-Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium battery
or other electronic parts.
-Battery may explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of fire.
CAUTION
If critical situations that could lead to user’s injury or only property damage is assumed
by mishandling of the product.
-To prevent excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation, use this product at the values less than
the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these specifications.
-Do not dismantle or remodel the product. It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke
generation.
-Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity. It could lead to an electric shock.
-Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit.
-Connect the wires or connectors securely.
The loose connection could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation.
-Ground the protective earth (PE) terminal (Class D grounding). Failure to do so could lead to an
electric shock.
-Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid, flammable materials, metals to go into the inside of the
product. It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation.
-Do not undertake construction (such as connection and disconnection) while the power supply is on.
It could lead to an electric shock.
Copyright / Trademarks
-This manual and its contents are copyrighted.
-You may not copy this manual,in whole or part,without written consent of Panasonic Electric
Works.,Ltd.
-Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
-Ethernet is registered trademarks of Xerox Corp. in the United States.
-All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
-Matsushita Electric Works,Ltd. pursues a policy of continuous improvement of the
Design and performance of its products, therefore,we reserve the right to change the manual/
product without notice.
X
Table of Contents
Before You Start
Differences in Functions Between Versions of Controller
Before You Start
Differences in Functions Between Versions of Controller
Restriction on using the Add-on cassette
Programming Tool Restrictions
5.1 Installation........................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.1 Installation Environment and Space ...........................................................................5-2
15.Specifications...................................................................................... 15-1
17 Appendix....................................................................................………17-1
Static electricity
-Before touching the unit, always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity.
-In dry locations, excessive static electricity can cause problems.
Backup battery
Do not install the battery when it is not used.
There is a possibility of leak if the battery remains discharged.
Differences in Functions Between Versions of Controller
Version Usable model Usable functions
UP/DOWN switching of high-speed counter by SYS instruction
Real number basic compare instructions 18 types
STF=S1, S2 ANF=S1, S2 ORF=S1, S2
STF<>S1, S2 ANF<>S1, S2 ORF<>S1, S2
V1.10 Ry type - STF>S1, S2 ANF>S1, S2 ORF>S1, S2
STF>=S1, S2 ANF>=S1, S2 ORF>=S1, S2
STF<S1, S2 ANF<S1, S2 ORF<S1, S2
STF<=S1, S2 ANF<=S1, S2 ORF<=S1, S2
System register 36 for setting expansion unit recognition time
MEWTOCOL master function
F145(SEND) Data send
V1.20 Ry type -
F146(RECV) Data receive
E356(EZPID) Easy PID instruction
Time constant processing of input (Refer to Chapter 12.6.)
CPU input: System register setting
Other input: F182(FILTR) Time constant processing
Sampling trace function (Refer to Chapter 12.5.)
Sampling by instrucitons
F155(SMPL) Sampling
F156(STRG) Sampling trigger
Sampling by specifying time
Leading contact, trailing contact instructions
ST↑ AN↑ OR↑
ST↓ AN↓ OR↓
An arbitrary device can be specified for the setting value of
V2.00 Ry type Tr type
Timer/counter instruction.
e.g.) TML 0, DT0
Other additional convenient instructions
F252(ACHK) ASCII data check
F284(RAMP) Inclination output
Baud rate setting (300, 600, 1200 bps) by SYS instruction
High-speed operaiton
F0(MV) and F1(DMV) instructions Execution time: Approx. 1us
Only when every operands are without index modifier.
Function addition to exsiting instructions
F70(BCC) Block check code calculation
F356(EZPID) Easy PID instruction
Note) The Ry and Tr types with the same specifications have the same version name
Application cassettes that have restrictions when more than one units are used simultaneously
Current output range
FP-X Application cassette Quantity Control unit
used C14 C30 C60
1 ○ ○ ○
AFPX-DA2 Note1)
2 - △ △ Note1)
1 ○ ○ ○
AFPX-A21
2 - ○ ○
AFPX-DA2 + AFPX-A21 Each 1 - △ Note1) △ Note1)
Note2)
AFPX-DA2 + AFPX-COM5 Each 1 × × Note2) × Note2)
Note2)
AFPX-A21 + AFPX-COM5 Each 1 × × Note2) × Note2)
AFPX-A21 + AFPX-DA2 + AFPX-COM5 Each 1 - × Note2) × Note2)
AFPX-DA2 1unit + AFPX-COM5 1unit - × Note2) × Note2)
AFPX-A21 2units + AFPX-COM5 1unit - × Note2) × Note2)
Note1) Up to 2 channels can be used for the current output range.
(When using two units, it is possible to use the 2-ch current output range and 2-ch voltage output range.)
Note2) The AFPX-DA2 and AFPX-A21 both cannot be used with the AFP-COM5 (Ethernet).
Voltage output range (When using with the output current of 1 mA or below)
FP-X Application cassette Quantity Control unit
used C14 C30 C60
1 ○ ○ ○
AFPX-DA2
2 - ○ ○
1 ○ ○ ○
AFPX-A21
2 - ○ ○
AFPX-DA2 + AFPX-A21 Each 1 - ○ ○
AFPX-DA2 + AFPX-COM5 Each 1 ○ ○ ○
AFPX-A21 + AFPX-COM5 Each 1 ○ ○ ○
AFPX-A21 + AFPX-DA2 + AFPX-COM5 Each 1 - ○ ○
AFPX-DA2 1unit + AFPX-COM5 1unit - ○ ○
AFPX-A21 2units + AFPX-COM5 1unit - ○ ○
Note) In the voltage output range, when using them with the output current at 1 mA to 10 mA,
the condition is the same as the current output range.
Programming Tool Restrictions
Restrictions on usable programming tools depending on the units (as of Feb. 2009)
Type of unit
AFPX-C14R AFPX-C14T, C14TD, C14P, C14PD
Type of programming tool
AFPX-C30R AFPX-C30T, C30TD, C30P, C30PD
AFPX-C60R AFPX-C60T, C60TD, C60P, C60PD
Used Used
FPWIN GR Ver.2
Windows software (Ver. 2.5 or later) (Ver. 2.70 or later)
FPWIN GR Ver.1 Not used Not used
FPWIN Pro
Windows software Used Used
Ver.6
Conforms to
FPWIN Pro Used Used
IEC61131-3
Ver.5 (Ver. 5.1 or later) (Ver. 5.22 or later)
NPST-GR Ver.4 Not used Not used
MS-DOS software
NPST-GR Ver.3 Not used Not used
AFP1113V2
Not used Not used
AFP1114V2
AFP1113
Not used Not used
Handy programming AFP1114
unit AFP1111A
AFP1112A
Not used Not used
AFP1111
AFP1112
AFP8670 Used
FP memory loader
AFP8671 (Only porgrams and system registers can be transmitted.)
Basic functions as compact size general-purpose PLC suitable for the small-scale facility control
Basic functions including the followings are equipped even though it is a general-purpose sytle such as
AC power supply, screw terminal block and relay output.
1. 32k-step program capacity
2. 0.32 μs command processing speed
3. Max. 382-points I/O control
Single-phase 8-channel and 2-phase 4 channel high-speed counter functions are equipped for
the control unit.
A personal computer can be directly connected with the USB communication port.
A personal computer can be directly connected with the USB cable (excluding C14).
The USB⇔RS232C conversion adapter/cable is not necessary.
(A tool port (RS232C) is also equipped.)
1-2
High demensional security functions to deal with copying programs.
The uploading disabling function prohibits uploading (reading) programs in the PLC main unit and
prevent illegal copying.
(It also enables to transfer the programs to the FP-X master memory cassette, when the uploading
disabling function is specified).
The protection for programs can be selected from
3 security methods.
• 4-digit password
• 8-digit password
• Uploading disabling
1-3
Supports Modbus RTU
It can be used as a master unit/slave units (F145 and F146 instructions).
It can be easily communicated with a temperature control device, inverter, FP-e or overseas PLCs.
It is possible to communicate with up to 99 units
MEWTOCOL communication
It can be used as a master unit/slave units (F145 and F146 instructions).
It can be easily communicated with a PLC, image processor, temperature control device, message
runner or eco-power meter.
It is possible to communicate with up to 99 units
1-4
Positioning control supported through high-speed counter and pulse output
With the FP-X Tr type, a high-speed counter function can be used by using the CPU I/O.
With the FP-X Ry type, a high-speed counter and pulse output functions can be used by using the pulse
I/O cassette. The pulse output function supports frequencies of up to 100kHz, enabling positioning
control using a stepping motor or servo motor.
Note) The pulse I/O cassette cannot be used for the FP-X Tr type.
Increment input mode, decrement input mode, 2-phase input mode, individual input mode, and direction
discrimination mode are supported.
Note) Differs depending on combinations.
1-5
1.2 Unit Types
AFPX-C14R 8/6
AFPX-C60RD 32/28
AFPX-C14T 8/6
AFPX-C60TD 32/28
AFPX-C14P 8/6
AFPX-C60PD 32/28
1-6
1.2.2 FP-X Expansion Unit
E14/E16 E30
FP-X Expansion
FP0 adapter (with 8
cm expansion For connecting FP0 expansion unit AFPX-EFP0
cable, power supply
cable)
1-7
1.2.4 Add-on Cassettes (Communication cassettes/Application cassettes)
Name Specifications Product No.
Communication FP-X Communication cassette 5-wire 1-channel RS232C AFPX-COM1
cassette FP-X Communication cassette 3-wire 2-channel RS232C AFPX-COM2
1-channel RS485/RS422
FP-X Communication cassette AFPX-COM3
(insulated)
1-channel RS485 (insulated)
FP-X Communication cassette AFPX-COM4
3-wire 1-channel RS232C
2-channel RS485 (insulated)
FP-X Communication cassette (non-insulated between AFPX-COM6
channels)
Ethernet,
FP-X Communication cassette AFPX-COM5
3-wire 1-channel RS232C
1-8
1.2.5 Related Parts
Name Description Product No.
Necessary fro the backup of
FP-X Backup battery data registers, etc. or for using AFPX-BATT
the realtime clock function.
For C30/C60 control unit
FP-X terminal block for E30 expansion I/O unit
AFPX-TAN1
(C30/C60) with 21-pin cover (no printing)
4 pcs/pack
8 cm AFPX-EC08
80 cm AFPX-EC80
Note) The total length of the exapansion cable should be within 160 cm.
1-9
1.3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations
Note:
- Up to eight units of FP-X can be connected, however, the restrictions on each expansion unit vary.
- For AFPX-E16/E14: Two units cannot be connected consecutively since the power should be supplied
from the unit with the power supply (as no power supply is built in AFPX-E16).
E16 expansion I/O unit cannot be connected on the right side of the control unit or AFPX-E30.
- For AFPX-E30: There is no restriction on AFPX-E30 so that up to 8 units can be connected
consecutively.
- The total length of the expansion cable should be within 160 cm.
1-10
1.3.2 Restrictions on FP0 Expansion Unit
Up to three dedicated FP0 expansion units can be added using the FP-X and the expansion FP0 adapter.
The relay output type and the transistor output type can be used in combination.
Note:
• Install the FP0 thermocouple unit on the right side of other expansion units. If it is installed on the left
side, the total precision will deteriorate.
• Install the FP0 CC-Link slave unit on the right side of the other expansion units. There is no expansion
connector on the right side.
1-11
1.3.3 Restrictions on FP-X Add-on Cassette
The add-on cassette is installed in the cassette mounting part 1 and 2 (only the cassette mounting part 1
is available for C14) of the control unit.
1-12
A: Available, N/A: Not available
FP-X C14
FP-X C30
Restrictions on control unit FP-X C30 FP-X C60
FP-X C60
FP-X C60
Cassette Cassette Expansion
Type of add-on cassette mounting mounting connector
part 1 part 2 part
FP-X Communication cassette AFPX-COM1 A N/A
FP-X Communication cassette AFPX-COM2 A N/A
Commu-
FP-X Communication cassette AFPX-COM3 A N/A
nication
FP-X Communication cassette AFPX-COM4 A N/A
cassette
FP-X Communication cassette AFPX-COM5 A N/A
FP-X Communication cassette AFPX-COM6 A N/A
FP-X Analog input cassette AFPX-AD2 A A The add-on
FP-X Input cassette AFPX-IN8 A A cassette
FP-X Analog output cassette AFPX-DA2 A A cannot be
FP-X Analog I/O cassette AFPX-A21 A A installed.
Appli-
FP-X Thermocouple cassette AFPX-TC2 A A
cation
FP-X Output cassette AFPX-TR8 A A
cassette
FP-X Output cassette AFPX-TR6P A A
FP-X I/O cassette AFPX-IN4T3 A A
FP-X Pulse I/O cassette AFPX-PLS A Note5) A Note5)
Note1)
FP-X Master memory cassette AFPX-MTRC A A Note1)
Note:
1. Only one FP-X master memory cassette AFPX-MRTC can be installed. If 2 units are installed, E26
(user ROM error) will occur.
2. One application cassette can be installed in either cassette mounting part 1 or 2 of C30/C60.
3. As only one communication cassette can be installed in the cassette mounting part 1, it should be
installed on on the application cassette if the application cassette is installed. (It cannot be installed in
the cassette mounting part 2.)
4. The add-on cassette cannot be installed in the expansion connector part of C60 (it does not work).
5. The pulse I/O cassette cannot be installed on the FP-X Tr type.
1-13
1.4 Programming Tools
Windows®2000
FPWIN Pro Ver.6 100MB or
Windows®XP AFPS50560
English-language menu more
Windows Vista®
Note1) The small type and upgrade version is not available for Ver.6.
Note2) Ver.6.0 can be upgraded to the latest version after Ver. 6.1 free of charge at our web site
(http://panasonic-electric-works.net/ac). Use the latest version.
1-14
Type of computer and suitable cable
For the connection between a personal computer (RS232C) and the control unit (RS232C)
PC side connector PLC side connector Specifications Product No.
female-Mini DIN round 5-pin L type (3 m) AFC8503
D-sub 9-pin
female-Mini DIN round 5-pin Straight type (3 m) AFC8503S
Note) A USB/RS232C conversion cable is necessary to connect with a personal computer without a
serial port using a PC connection cable.
For the connection between a personal computer (USB) and the control unit (USB)
USB cable (For C30 and C60 only)
Use a commercial cable.
Cable type Length
USB 2.0 (or 1.1) AB type Max. 5 m
1-15
1-16
Chapter 2
Specifications and Functions of Control
Unit
2.1 Parts and Functions
2-2
Status indicator LEDs
These LEDs display the current mode of operation or the occurrence of an error.
LED LED and operation status
Lights when in the RUN mode and indicates that the program is
being executed.
RUN Green
It flashes during forced input/output. (The RUN and PROG. LEDs
flash alternately.)
Lights when in the PROG. Mode and indicates that operation has
stopped.
PROG. Green Lights when in the PROG. Mode during forced input/output.
It flashes during forced input/output. (The RUN and PROG. LEDs
flash alternately.)
Flashes when an error is detected during the self-diagnostic
ERROR/ function. (ERROR)
Red
ALARM Lights if a hardware error occurs, or if oepration slows because of
the program, and the watchdog timer is activated. (ALARM)
2-3
Tool port (RS232C)
This port is used to connect a programming tool.
A commercial mini-DIN 5-pin connector is used for the Tool port on the control unit.
Pin No. Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction
1 Signal Ground SG −
2 Send Data SD Unit → External device
3 Receive Data RD Unit ← External device
4 (Not used) − −
5 +5V +5V Unit → External device
The followings are the default settings set when the unit is shipped from the factory. The system register
“Tool port setting” should be used to change these.
- Baud rate …….. 9600 bps
- Character bit …. 8 bit
- Parity check ….. Odd parity
- Stop bit length .. 1 bit
Note) The unit numbers (station numbers) of the tool port should be specified using the system register
“Tool port setting”.
Expansion cover
It is used after the expansion cable and the battery has been installed.
Connector For connecting expansion I/O unit and expansion FP0 adapter
An exclusive expansion cable is inserted.
Battery cover
This battery cover is removed when the optional backup battery is installed.
Installing the backup battery enables the backup of the realtime clock or data registers.
2-4
2.2 Power Supply Specifications
2.2.2 Service Power Supply for Input (Output) (AC Power Supply Type Only)
Specifications
Item
C14 C30/C60
Rated output voltage 24 V DC
Voltage regulation range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Rated output current 0.15 A 0.4 A
Overcurrent protection
Available
function Note)
Terminal screw M3
Note) This is a function to protect overcurernt temporarily, which protects the output short-circuit. If the
short-circuit is detected, all the power supply for the PLC will be turned off. If a current load that is
out of the specifications is connected and the overloaded status continues, it may lead to damages.
2-5
2.3 Input Specifications
Circuit diagram
2-6
2.3.2 Transistor (Tr) Type (Common to NPN and PNP)
Transistor type (common to NPN and PNP)
Description
Item
C14 C30/C60
Insulation method Optical coupler
Rated input voltage 24V DC
Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4V DC
Approx. 8 mA (for control units X0 to X3)
Rated input current Approx. 4.7 mA (for control units X4 to X7)
Approx. 4.3 mA (from control unit X8)
8 points/common 16 points/common
Input points per common (Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be
connected to common terminal.)
19.2 V DC/6 mA (for control units X0 to X3)
Min. on voltage/Min. on current
19.2 V DC/3 mA (from control unit X4)
2.4V DC/1.3 mA (for control units X0 to X3)
Max. off voltage/Max. off current
2.4V DC/1 mA (from control unit X4)
Approx. 3 kΩ (for control units X0 to X3)
Input impedance Approx. 5.1 kΩ (for control units X4 to X7)
Approx. 5.6 kΩ (from control unit X8 )
For control units X0 to X3:
135 μs or less: normal input
5 μs or less Note): high-speed counter, pulse catch,
interrupt input settings
For control units X4 to X7:
off→on
Response time 135 μs or less: normal input
50 μs or less Note): high-speed counter, pulse catch,
interrupt input settings
From control unit X8 (C30/C60 only) :
0.6 ms or less
on→off Same as above
Operating mode indicator LED display
EN61131-2 Applicable type TYPE3 (however, according to the above specifications)
Note) this specification is applied when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC and the temperature is 25 °C.
Circuit diagram
[X0 to X3] [From X4]
X4 to X7 :R1=5.1kΩ R2=3kΩ
From X8 :R1=5.6kΩ R2=1kΩ
2-7
2.4 Output Specifications
Circuit diagram
2-8
2.4.2 Transistor (Tr) Type (NPN)
Output specifications
Description
Item
C14 C30/C60
Insulation method Optical coupler
Output type Open collector
Rated load voltage 5 to 24 V DC
Allowable load voltage
4.75 to 26.4 V DC
range
Max. load current 0.5 A
Max. inrush current 1.5 A
Input points per
6 points/Common 8 points/Common, 6 points/Common
common
Off state leakage
1 μA or less
current
On state voltage drop 0.3 V DC or less
2 μs or less (Y0 to Y3) (Load current: at 15 mA or more)
20 μs or less (C14: Y4 to Y5, C30/C60: Y4 to Y7)(Load current: at 15 mA or
OFF→ON
more)
Response
1 ms or less (C14: None, C30/C60: from Y8)
time
8 μs or less (Y0 to Y3) (Load current: at 15 mA or more)
(at 25°C)
30 μs or less (C14: Y4 to Y5, C30/C60: Y4 to Y7)
ON→OFF
(Load current: at 15 mA or more)
1 ms or less (C14: None, C30/C60: from Y8)
Voltage 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Y0 to Y5 (Y7) Y8 to YD Y10 to Y17 Y18 to Y1D
40 mA
C14 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
External power supply or less
(+ and – terminals) Current 60 mA 35 mA
C30 ⎯ ⎯
or less or less
60 mA 35 mA 45 mA 35 mA
C60
or less or less or less or less
Surge absorber Zener diode
Operating mode
LED display
indicator
Circuit diagram
[NPN output]
[X0 to X3] [From X4]
2-9
2.4.3 Transistor (Tr) Type (PNP)
Output specifications
Description
Item
C14 C30/C60
Insulation method Optical coupler
Output type Open collector
Rated load voltage 24 V DC
Allowable load voltage
21.6 to 26.4 V DC
range
Max. load current 0.5 A
Max. inrush current 1.5 A
Input points per common 6 points/Common 8 points/Common, 6 points/Common
Off state leakage current 1 μA or less
On state voltage drop 0.5 V DC or less
2 μs or less (Y0 to Y3) (Load current: at 15 mA or more)
20 μs or less (C14: Y4 to Y5, C30/C60: Y4 to Y7)
OFF→ON
(Load current: at 15 mA or more)
Response 1 ms or less (C14: None, C30/C60: from Y8)
time 8 μs or less (Y0 to Y3) (Load current: at 15 mA or more)
30 μs or less (C14: Y4 to Y5, C30/C60: Y4 to Y7)
ON→OFF
(Load current: at 15 mA or more)
1 ms or less (C14: None, C30/C60: from Y8)
Voltage 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Y0 to Y5 (Y7) Y8 to YD Y10 to Y17 Y18 to Y1D
75 mA
C14 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
External power supply or less
(+ and – terminals) Current 95 mA 50 mA
C30 ⎯ ⎯
or less or less
95 mA 50 mA 65 mA 50 mA
C60
or less or less or less or less
Surge absorber Zener diode
Operating mode indicator LED display
Circuit diagram
[PNP output]
[Y0 to Y3] [from Y4]
2-10
2.5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input/Output
On Points
AFPX-C30R
AFPX-C60R
AFPX-C14RD
AFPX-C30RD
AFPX-C60RD
2-11
2.5.2 Relay (Ry) Type (With AFPX-DA2 and AFPX-A21 (Current Output))
Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the
ambient temperature.
Limitations on number of Limitations on number of
Product number
simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points
AFPX-C14R - Configuration
DA2
A21
A21+A21
DA2+DA2 (*)
DA2+A21 (*)
AFPX-C30R * Up to 2
channels can
be used for
the current
output.
AFPX-C60R
AFPX-C14RD
AFPX-C30RD
AFPX-C60RD
2-12
2.5.3 Relay (Ry) Type (AFPX-DA2 and AFPX–A21 Voltage Output)
Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the
ambient temperature.
Limitations on number of Limitations on number of
Product number
simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points
AFPX-C14R - Configuration
DA2
A21
A21+A21
DA2+DA2
DA2+A21
AFPX-C30R
AFPX-C60R
AFPX-C14RD
AFPX-C30RD
AFPX-C60RD
2-13
2.5.4 Transistor (Tr) Type (NPN) (Stand-alone and With AFPX-COM5)
Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the
ambient temperature.
Limitations on number of Limitations on number of
Product number
simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points
AFPX-C14T - Configuration
Stand-alone
COM5
.
AFPX-C30T
AFPX-C60T
AFPX-C14TD
AFPX-C30TD
AFPX-C60TD
2-14
2.5.5 Transistor (Tr) Type (NPN) (With AFPX-DA2 and A21 (Current Output))
Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the
ambient temperature.
Limitations on number of Limitations on number of
Product number
simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points
AFPX-C14T - Configuration
DA2
A21
A21+A21
DA2+DA2 (*)
DA2+A21 (*)
* Up to 2
AFPX-C30T
channels can
be used for the
current output.
AFPX-C60T
AFPX-C14TD
AFPX-C30TD
AFPX-C60TD
2-15
2.5.6 Transistor (Tr) Type (NPN) (With AFPX-DA2 and A21 (Voltage Output)
Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the
ambient temperature.
Limitations on number of Limitations on number of
Product number
simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points
AFPX-C14T - Configuration
DA2
A21
A21+A21
DA2+DA2
DA2+A21
AFPX-C30T
AFPX-C60T
AFPX-C14TD
AFPX-C30TD
AFPX-C60TD
2-16
2.5.7 Transistor (Tr) Type (PNP) (Stand-alone and With AFPX-COM5)
Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the
ambient temperature.
Limitations on number of Limitations on number of
Product number
simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points
AFPX-C14P - Configuration
Stand-alone
COM5
AFPX-C30P
AFPX-C60P
AFPX-C14PD
AFPX-C30PD
AFPX-C60PD
2-17
2.5.8 Transistor (Tr) Type (PNP) (With AFPX-DA2 and A21 (Current Output))
Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the
ambient temperature.
Limitations on number of Limitations on number of
Product number
simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points
AFPX-C14P - Configuration
DA2
A21
A21+A21
DA2+DA2 (*)
DA2+A21 (*)
* Up to 2
AFPX-C30P
channels can
be used for
the current
output.
AFPX-C60P
AFPX-C14PD
AFPX-C30PD
AFPX-C60PD
2-18
2.5.9 Transistor (Tr) Type (PNP) (With AFPX-DA2 and A21 Voltage Output)
Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the
ambient temperature.
Limitations on number of Limitations on number of
Product number
simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points
AFPX-C14P - Configuration
DA2
A21
A21+A21
DA2+DA2
DA2+A21
AFPX-C30P
AFPX-C60P
AFPX-C14PD
AFPX-C30PD
AFPX-C60PD
2-19
2.6 Terminal Layout
AFPX-C30R
AFPX-C30RD
2-20
AFPX-C60R
AFPX-C60RD
Key Point:
Input terminal:
Each COM terminal in the same terminal block is connected within the unit.
However, the COM terminals of the input terminals 1 and 2 for C60 are isolated. (They are not
connected internally.)
Output terminal:
Each COM port (CO, C1 …) is separate. Use them in the range surrounded by the bold black lines.
2-21
2.6.2 Transistor type
AFPX-C14T
AFPX-C14P
AFPX-C14TD
2-22
AFPX-C14PD
AFPX-C30T
AFPX-C30P
2-23
AFPX-C30TD
AFPX-C30PD
AFPX-C60T
2-24
AFPX-C60P
AFPX-C60TD
AFPX-C6PD
Key Point:
Input terminal:
Each COM terminal in the same terminal block is connected within the unit.
However, the COM terminals of the input terminals 1 and 2 for C60 are isolated. (They are not
connected internally.)
Output terminal:
Each power supply terminal is separate. Use them in the range surrounded by the bold black lines.
2-25
2-26
Chapter 3
Expansion Cassette and Expansion FP0
Adapter Specifications
3.1 Expansion Method
Two types of expansion method are available for the FP-X.
1. Installs the FP-X expansion unit or FP0 expansion unit (expandion FP0 adapter) using the
expansion cable.
2. Installs the add-on cassette to the cassette mounting part of the FP-X control unit.
Note: Only one expansion FP0 adapter can be installed at the last position of the FP-X expansion
bus. (It should be installed at the right hand side of the AFPX-E16 and E30.)
Up to seven FP-X expansion I/O units can be also installed between the control unit and
the expansion FP0 adapter. However, there are restrictions on E14/E16.
3-2
3.2 FP-X Expansion Unit
Service Power Supply for Input (Output) (AC power supply type only)
Specifications
Item
E30
Rated output voltage 24 V DC
Voltage regulation range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Rated output current 0.4 A
Overcurrent protection
Available
function Note)
Terminal screw M3
Note) This is a function to protect overcurernt temporarily. If a current load that is out of the
specifications is connected, it may lead to damages.
DC Power Supply
Specifications
Item
E30
Rated voltage 24 V DC
Voltage regulation range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC
Inrush current 12 A or less (at 25 °C)
Momentary power off time 10 ms
Internal power supply part
20,000 hours (at 55 °C)
Guaranteed life
Fuse Built-in (Cannot be replaced)
Insulation system Transformer insulation
Terminal screw M3
3-4
3.2.3 Input and output specifications
Input specifications
Description
Item
E16 E30
Insulation method Optical coupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC
Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Rated input current Approx. 4.3 mA
8 points/common 16 points/common
Input points per common (Either the positive or negative of input power supply can be
connected to common terminal.)
Min. on voltage/Min. on current 19.2 V DC/3 mA
Max. off voltage/Max. off current 2.4 V DC/1 mA
Input impedance Approx. 5.6 kΩ
off→on 0.6 ms or less
Response time
on→off 0.6 ms or less
Operating mode indicator LED display
EN61131-2Applicable type TYPE3 (however, according to the above specifications)
Circuit diagram
: R1=5.6 kΩ R2=1 kΩ
Circuit diagram
3-5
Transistor type (NPN)
Description
Item
E16 E30
Insulation method Optical coupler
Output type Open collector
Rated load voltage 5 to 24 V DC
Allowable load voltage range 4.75 to 26.4 V DC
Max. load current 0.5 A
Max. inrush current 1.5 A
8 points/Common,
Input points per common 8 points/Common
6 points/Common
Off state leakage current 1 μA or less
On state voltage drop 0.3 V DC or less
OFF→ON 1 ms or less
Response time
ON→OFF 1 ms or less
Voltage 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
External power supply Y0 to Y7 Y8 to YD
(+ and – terminals) Current E16 45 mA or less ⎯
E30 45 mA or less 35 mA or less
Surge absorber Zener diode
Operating mode indicator LED display
Circuit diagram
3-6
Transistor type (PNP)
Description
Item
E16 E30
Insulation method Optical coupler
Output type Open collector
Rated load voltage 24 V DC
Allowable load voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Max. load current 0.5 A
Max. inrush current 1.5 A
8 points/Common,
Input points per common 8 points/Common
6 points/Common
Off state leakage current 1 μA or less
On state voltage drop 0.5 V DC or less
OFF→ON 1 ms or less
Response time
ON→OFF 1 ms or less
Voltage 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
External power supply Y0 to Y7 Y8 to YD
(+ and – terminals) Current E16 65 mA or less ⎯
E30 65 mA or less 50 mA or less
Surge absorber Zener diode
Operating mode indicator LED display
Circuit diagram
3-7
3.2.4 Terminal layout
AFPX-E16R
AFPX-E16T AFPX-E16P
AFPX-E16X AFPX-E14YR
3-8
AFPX-E30R
AFPX-E30RD
AFPX-E30T
3-9
AFPX-E30P
AFPX-E30TD
AFPX-E30PD
Input terminal:
Each COM terminal in the same terminal block is connected within the unit.
Output terminal:
Each COM terminal(CO, C1 …) of Ry type is separate.
Each power supply terminal of Tr type is separate. Use them in the range surrounded by the
bold black lines.
3-10
3.3 FP-X Expansion FP0 Adapter
3.3.1 Overview
For the FP-X, a maximum of 3 units of the FP0 expansion units (expansion I/O unit, intelligent unit) can
be used using the expansion FP0 adapter.
Note:
The expansion FP0 adapter does not functionn by itself. Always connect the FP0 expansion unit to it.
3-11
3.3.2 Parts and Functions
FP-X expansion FP0 adapter (AFPX-EFP0)
General specifications
Item Specifications
Rated voltage 24 V DC
Voltage regulation 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Surge current 20A or less (24 V DC, at 25 °C)
Fuse Built-in (Replacement is not available)
Insulation system Non-isolated
Power supply connector 3-pin connector (Power supply cable AFP0581 is provided.)
Reference:
For information on consumption current, <15.1 Table of Specifications ♦Unit’s current consumption
table>
3-12
Chapter 4
I/O Allocation
4.1 I/O Allocation
Input Output
Control unit X0 to X9F (WX0 to WX9) Y0 to Y9F (WY0 to WY9)
Cassette mounting part 1
X100 to X19F (WX10 to WX19) Y100 to Y19F (WY10 to WY19)
(Slot 0)
Cassette mounting part 2
X200 to X29F (WX20 to WX29) Y200 to Y29F (WY20 to WY29)
(Slot 1)
Expansion 1st unit X300 to X39F (WX30 to WX39) Y300 to Y39F (WY30 to WY39)
Expansion 2nd unit X400 to X49F (WX40 to WX49) Y400 to Y49F (WY40 to WY49)
Expansion 3rd unit X500 to X59F (WX50 to WX59) Y500 to Y59F (WY50 to WY59)
Expansion 4th unit X600 to X69F (WX60 to WX69) Y600 to Y69F (WY60 to WY69)
Expansion 5th unit X700 to X79F (WX70 to WX79) Y700 to Y79F (WY70 to WY79)
Expansion 6th unit X800 to X89F (WX80 to WX89) Y800 to Y89F (WY80 to WY89)
Expansion 7th unit X900 to X99F (WX90 to WX99) Y900 to Y99F (WY90 to WY99)
X1000 to X109F Y1000 to Y109F
Expansion 8th unit
(WX100 to WX109) (WY100 to WY109)
Note) The ranges of the I/O numbers which are actually used differ depending on the cassettes and units.
• Slot No.
Slot No. is the number indicating the installing position of the cassette which is used to generate
programs by the add-on cassette.
4-2
4.2 Allocation of FP-X Control Unit
The I/O allocation of FP-X control unit is fixed.
I/O numbers
Type of control unit Number of allocation I/O number
Input (8 points) X0 to X7
FP-X C14 control unit
Output (6 points) Y0 to Y5
Input (16 points) X0 to XF
FP-X C30 control unit
Output (14 points) Y0 to YD
X0 to XF
Input (32 points)
X10 to X1F
FP-X C60 control unit
Y0 to YD
Output (28 points)
Y10 to Y1D
4-3
4.4 Allocation of FP0 Expansion Unit
4-4
4.4.3 I/O Allocation of FP0 Expansion Unit
I/O do not need to be set as I/O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added.
The I/O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location.
4-5
4.5 I/O Allocation of FP-X Add-on Cassette
The FP-X add-on cassette is mounted on the FP-X control unit.
I/O numbers
I/O No.
Cassette Cassette
Type of control unit
mounting part 1 mounting part 2
Slot 0 Slot 1
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM1 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM2 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM3 − −
Communication cassette
cassette FP-X communication
AFPX-COM4 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM5 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM6 − −
cassette
FP-X analog input CH0 WX10 CH0 WX20
AFPX-AD2
cassette Note2) CH1 WX11 CH1 WX21
FP-X analog output CH0 WY10 CH0 WY20
AFPX-DA2
cassette CH1 WY11 CH1 WY21
CH0 WX10 CH0 WX20
FP-X analog I/O
AFPX-A21 CH1 WX11 CH1 WX21
cassette
WY10 WY20
FP-X thermocouple CH0 WX10 CH0 WX20
AFPX-TC2
Application cassette CH1 WX11 CH1 WX21
cassette FP-X input cassette AFPX-IN8 From X100 From X200
FP-X output cassette AFPX-TR8 From Y100 From Y200
FP-X output cassette AFPX-TR6P From Y100 From Y200
From X100 From X200
FP-X I/O cassette AFPX-IN4T3
From Y100 From Y200
FP-X pulse I/O cassette From X100 From X200
Note3) AFPX-PLS
From Y100 From Y200
FP-X master memory
AFPX-MRTC − −
cassette
Note1) There is no I/O for the communication cassette and master memory cassette.
Note2) Digital conversion values are K0 to 4000. As the resolution is 12 bits, upper 4 bits are always 0.
Note3) The pulse I/O cassette cannot be used with the Tr type.
4-6
Chapter 5
Installation and Wiring
5.1 Installation
Be thoroughly familiar with the following contents before using the units to eliminate the causes which
occur the failure or malfunction of each unit.
Static electricity
-Before touching the unit, always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity.
-In dry locations, excessive static electricity can cause problems.
• Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such heaters, transformers or large scale
resistors.
5-2
Installation space
• Leave at least 50mm of space between the wiring ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat
radiation and unit replacement.
• Maintain at least 100mm of space between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when
installing a device or panel door to the front of the PLC unit.
• Leave at least 100mm of space opean from the front surface of the control unit in order to allow room
for programming tool connections and wiring.
(2) Without moving the upper hook, press on the lower hook to fit the
unit into position.
5-3
Installation with screws
Use M4 size screws for the installation
(2) Without moving the upper hook, press on the lower hook to fit the
unit into position.
Tighten the screws after joining all of the slim type mounting plate to be connected. Tighten the screws
at each of the four corners.
[Example] When two expansion units
5-4
5.2 Installation Using Expansion Cable
The FP-X expansion unit and the FP-X expansion FP0 adapter are connected to the control unit using
the exclusive expansion cable.
-The expansion cable (AFPX-EC08) is packaged with the expansion unit and expansion FP0 adapter.
(It can be purchased separately.) The expansion cables (AFPX-EC30 and AFPX-EC80) are sold
separately.
Note:
-The total length of the expansion cables should be within 160 cm.
-When using the expansion cable (AFPX-EC30 or EC80), keep it away from the devices and wirings
generating noises as much as possible.
5-5
5.2.1 Expansion Method of FP-X Expansion Unit
1. Remove the expansion cover.
2. Fit the expansion connector cable into the expansion connector part of the control unit and the
one (left side) of the expansion I/O unit.
3. Push the expansion connector cable inside to touch the units each other.
4. Set the terminator setting switch. All the switches of the expansion unit installed at the last
position should be on.
5-6
5.2.2 How to Connect with FP-X Expansion FP0 Adapter
1. Remove the expansion cover.
There is no expansion cover for the expansion FP0 adapter.
2. Fit the expansion connector cable into the expansion connector part.
Note:
Although there is no terminator setting switch for the expansion FP0 adapter, the terminator setting has
been done within the expansion FP0 adapter. Turn off the terminator setting switches of the other
expansion units.
5-7
5.3 Expansion Method of FP0 Expansion Unit
The FP0 expansion unit (expansion unit, intelligent unit) is expected by connecting to the right side of the
FP-X expansion FP0 adapter.
Unit expansion is done using the right-side connector for FP0 expansion and expansion hook on the side
of the unit.
1. Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom sides of the unit with a screwdriver.
2. Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit and expansion unit, and insert
the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units.
3. Press down the expansion hooks raised in step 1 to secure the unit.
5-8
5.4 How to Install Add-on Cassette
The add-on cassette is fitted with the control unit using the provided screws.
Note:
The add-on cassette must be secured with the control unit using the screws in the actual use for
preventing the affect of vibrations.
The backup battery (option) should be before installing the add-on cassette.
The installation must be carried out when the power supply is off. If the power supply is on, it may cause
faults.
Recommended screw
Recommended screw Size and other conditions Quantity
Material: SW pan head (+) P-tight 2.6-16
Tapping screw 2 pcs/1 cassette
galvanization, trivalent chromate (black)
Note:
The communication cassette can be installed only in the cassette mounting part 1 of the control
unit.
The screw’s tightening torque should be 0.3 to 0.5 N・m. Screw securely.
5-9
5.4.2 Installing Application Cassette
Note:
The application cassette can be installed only in the cassette mounting part 1 and 2 of the control
unit.
The screw’s tightening torque should be 0.3 to 0.5 N・m. Screw securely.
5-10
5.5 Power Supply
Confirm that the power supply voltage is within the allowable range of the power supply.
Allowable voltage Allowable frequency
Rated input voltage Rated frequnecy
amplitude range range
100 to 240 V AC 85 to 264 V AC 50/60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz
Note:
Using the power supply of the outlying voltage and frequency, or using inappropriate wires may cause
the fault of the power supply of the PLC.
Reference: <5.7 Wiring of Terminal Block>
5-11
Note: Power supply of the FP-X expansion units
Be sure to supply power to the FP-X expansion units and the control unit from the same power supply,
and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both.
Grounding
Ground the instrument to increase noise suppression.
Exclusive grounding
• For gounding purposes, use wiring with a minimum of 2 mm2. The grounding connection should have a
resistance of less than 100Ω.
• The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible. The ground wire should be as
short as possible.
• If two devices share a single ground point, it may produce an adverse effect. Always use an exclusive
ground for each device.
5-12
5.5.2 DC Power Supply
Wiring of power supply
Confirm that the power supply voltage is within the allowable range of the power supply.
Allowable voltage
Rated input voltage
amplitude range
24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Note:
Using the power supply of the outlying voltage, or using inappropriate wires may cause the fault of the
power supply of the PLC.
Reference: <5.7 Wiring of Terminal Block>
5-13
Note: Power supply of the FP-X expansion units
Be sure to supply power to the FP-X expansion units and the control unit from the same power supply,
and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both.
Grounding
Ground the instrument to increase noise suppression.
Exclusive grounding
• For gounding purposes, use wiring with a minimum of 2 mm2. The grounding connection should have a
resistance of less than 100Ω.
• The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible. The ground wire should be as
short as possible.
• If two devices share a single ground point, it may produce an adverse effect. Always use an exclusive
ground for each device.
5-14
5.5.3 Power Supply for Expansion FP0 Adapter
Power supply from the servicing power supply for the input of the FP-X control unit
• To protect the system against erroneous voltage from the power supply line, use an insulated power
supply with an internal protective circuit (electric cable that reinforced insulation or double insulation
has been made).
• The regulator on the unit is a non-insulated type.
• To turn the power supplies on simultaneously, supply the power for the expansion FP0 adapter from
the servicing power supply for the input of the FP-X control unit.
5-15
Measures regarding power supply sequence (start up sequence)
• To ensure and ease the power supply sequence of the expansion FP0 adapter, supply the power for
the expansion FP0 adapter from the servicing power supply for the input of the FP-X control unit.
• The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the FP0 expansion unit is turned on
before the FP-X system power supply.
• The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the FP-X system and FP0 expansion
unit is turned off before the input/output power supplies. If the input/output power supplies are turned
off before the power to the expansion FP0 adapter, the control unit will detect the input fluctuations and
may begin an unscheduled operation.
Grounding
- In situations of excess noise
Under normal conditions, the inherent noise resistance is sufficient. However, in situations of excess
noise, ground the instrument to increase noise suppression.
- Exclusive grounding
• The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100Ω.
• The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible. The ground wire should be as
short as possible.
• If two devices share a single ground point, it may produce an adverse effect. Always use an exclusive
ground for each device.
Note:
Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used, grounding may cause problems.
[Example]
Since the power supply line of the expansion FP0 adapter power supply connector is connected to the
function earth through a varistor, if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line and earth,
the varistor may be shorted.
5-16
5.6 Wiring of Input and Output
Do not apply the voltage that exceeds the rated input voltage to the input terminal.
5-17
Precaution when using LED-equipped limit switch
If the input of PLC does not turn off because of
the leakage current from the LED-equipped limit
switch, the use of a bleeder resistor is
recommended, as shown below.
5-18
When using a DC inductive load
Others
• Wiring should be carried out after the power supply to the PLC was turned off.
• Also turn of the power supply when the control unit, expansion units and various cassettes are
connected. If they are connected during the power supply is on, it may cause the fault or malfunction.
5-19
5.7 Wiring of Terminal Block
Supplied terminal block/Suitable wires
M3 terminal screws are used for the terminal. The following suitable solderless terminals are
recommended for the wiring to the terminals
Suitable wires
Suitable wires Tightening torque
AWG22 to 14 0.3 to 2.0 mm2
Note:
Install the terminal block cover as it was after wiring to prevent electric shock.
5-20
How to remove the terminal block
The terminal blocks used for C30/C60/E30 can be removed for fitting the screws.
(The terminal block for C14/E16 cannot be removed.)
5-21
5.8 Wiring of Add-on Cassette Terminal Block
A screw-down connection type for terminal block is used for the add-on cassette. The suitable wires are
given below.
5-22
Wiring method
(1) Remove a portion of the wire’s insulation.
(2) Insert the wire into the terminal block until it contacts the back of the block socket, and then
tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place. (Tightening torque: 0.22 to 0.25 N·m)
Precautions on wiring
• When removing the wire’s insulation, be careful not to scratch the core wire.
• Do not twist the wires to connect them.
• Do not solder the wires to connect them. The solder may break due to vibration.
• After wiring, make sure stress is not applied to the wire.
• In the terminal block socket construction, if the wire closes upon counter-clockwise rotation, the
connection is faulty. Disconnect the wire, check the terminal hole, and then re-connect the wire.
• If two wires are connected to the plus terminal and minus terminal of the RS485, use the wires of the
same cross-sectional area which is 0.5 mm2.
5-23
5.8.1 Transmission Cables
Please use the following cables for systems using the communication cassette.
1P
2 Max. Polychlo-
0.5 mm Max. Approx. VCTF-0.5
VCTF 37.8 rinated 2
(AWG20) 0.6 mm 6.2 mm mm x 2C(JIS)
Ω/km biphenyl
2
Shielded 0.3 mm Max. Onamba Co.,
Vinyl Max. Approx.
multicore (AWG22) 58.8 Ltd. ONB-D6 x
chloride 0.3 mm 6.6 mm
cable or greater Ω/km 0.3 mm
2
Note:
• Use shielded twisted pair cables.
• Use only one type of transmission cable. Do not mix more than 1 type.
• Twisted pair cables are recommended in noisy environments.
• When using shielded cable with crossover wiring for the RS485 transmission line, grounded one end.
• If two wires are connected to the plus terminal and minus terminal of the RS485, use the wires of the
same cross-sectional area which is 0.5 mm2.
5-24
5.9 Installation and Setting of Backup Battery
Installing a backup battery in the FP-X makes it possible to access realtime clock function for use (when
the master memory cassette AFPX-MRTC is installed), in addition to backing up data registers and other
data.
Battery (Option)
Quantity that can be installed
Name Part No.
C14 C30 C60
Backup battery for FP-X AFPX-BATT 1 pc Max. 2 pcs Max. 3 pcs
The battery can be installed in the cassette mounting parts 1, 2 and the expansion connector part.
5-25
5.9.1 Installation of Backup Battery
The procedure shown below is the one after the expansion cover was removed.
1. Remove the battery cover.
Overhead view
Note) When replacing the battery, turn off the power after supplying the power more than 5 min., and
then fit the new battery within 2 minutes of removing the old one.
5-26
5.9.2 System Register Setting
Setting of the battery error alarm
In the system register default settings, “No. 4 Alarm Battery Error” is set to “Off”. When using the battery,
set system register No. 4 of the control unit so that the battery error alarm is turned on.
For hold area setting using FPWIN GR, select “PLC Configuration” on the “Option” menu, and click on
“Hold/Non-hold1” and “Hold/Non-hold 2”.
Note:
• The setting of the system registers Nos. 6 to 14 is effective only when the backup battery is mounted.
• Without the battery, use at the default settings. If changing the settings, the “Hold/Non-hold” operation
becomes unstable.
• Without the settings, the data may be lost as the result of the battery shutoff.
1. Special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will go on if the battery voltage drops.
2. ERROR/ALARM LED will flash.
The battery remains effective for about a week after the alarm is issued, but in some cases the problem
is not detected immediately. The battery should be replaced as soon as possible.
Note) When replacing the battery, turn off the power after supplying the power more than 5 min.,
and then fit the new battery within 2 minutes of removing the old one.
Key Point: When the backup battery has not been installed
R9005 and R9006 are always on regardless of the setting of the system register No. 4.
5-27
5.9.4 Lifetime of Backup Battery
The life of the backup battery will eventually expire and therefore it is important to replace it with
a new battery periodically. Refer to the table below for a guide as to when to replace the battery.
1 pc for C14, max. 2 pcs for C30 and max. 3 pcs for C60 can be connected.
Battery lifetime: when the master memory cassette (AFPX-MRTC) is not installed
Descriptions
Control unit Suggested Typical lifetime in
Quantity used Battery lifetime
replacement interval actual use
C14 1 3.3 years or more 5 years 20 years (25 °C)
1 2.7 years or more 4 years 20 years (25 °C)
C30
2 5.4 years or more 8 years 20 years (25 °C)
1 2.7 years or more 4 years 20 years (25 °C)
C60 2 5.4 years or more 8 years 20 years (25 °C)
3 8.1 years or more 12 years 20 years (25 °C)
Note1) The battery lifetime is the value when no power at all is supplied.
Note2) Note that the lifetime in actual use may be shorter than the typical lifetime depending on the use
conditions.
5-28
5.10 Safety Measures
5-29
5-30
Chapter 6
Tool Port and USB Port
6.1 Tool Port and USB Port
The followings are the default settings set when the unit is shipped from the factory.
- Baud rate …….. 9600 bps
- Character bit …. 8 bit
- Parity check ….. Odd parity
- Stop bit length .. 1 bit
USB connector
This is a connector to connect the programming tool.
Commercial USB cables (AB type) can be used.
The connector is the commercial B type.
6-2
6.2 Functions of Tool Port
Computer link
• Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC. Instructions
(command messages) are transmitted to the PLC, and the PLC responds (sends response messages)
based on the instructions received.
• A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL-COM is used to exchange data between the
computer and the PLC. There are two different communication methods, 1:1 and 1:N communication. A
1:N network is called a C-NET. The maximum of 99 FP-X units can be connected with one personal
computer.
• The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer, so no program is
necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication.
Note:
• The data received before changing to the PROG mode remain in the data registers. Execute the F159
(MTRN) instruction right after the mode was changed to the RUN mode and clear them.
6-3
6.2.2 Tool Port Setting
Setting communication parameters in the computer link mode
Setting for Baud rate and communication format
The settings for baud rate and communication format of the tool port are entered using the FPWIN GR.
Select “Options” in the menu bar, and then select “PLC Configuration”. Double-click “Tool Port”.
To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the tool port, enter the
settings for the various items. (The terminator and the header cannot be changed.)
6-4
Setting communication parameters in the general-purpose serial communication mode
By default, the tool port is set to “Computer link”. System register settings should be entered for the
following items.
The settings for baud rate and communication format are made using the FPWIN GR programming tool.
Select “Options” in the menu bar, and then select “PLC Configuration”. Click “Tool Port”.
No. 420 Starting address for data received in general-purpose communication mode
No. 421 Buffer capacity setting for data received in general-purpose communication mode
To use general-purpose serial communication, the receive buffer must be specified. To change this area,
specify the starting address using system register no. 420 and the volume (number of words) using no.
421. The receive buffer layout is shown below.
6-5
6.3 USB Port
Note:
With the USB port, do not specify the modes other than the computer link.
Computer link
• Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC. Instructions
(command messages) are transmitted to the PLC, and the PLC responds (sends response messages)
based on the instructions received.
• A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL-COM is used to exchange data between the
computer and the PLC. There are two different communication methods, 1:1 and 1:N communication. A
1:N network is called a C-NET. The maximum of 99 FP-X units can be connected with one personal
computer.
• The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer, so no program is
necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication.
6-6
6.3.2 USB Port Setting
Setting communication parameters in the computer link mode
Setting for Baud rate and communication format
The settings for baud rate and communication format of the tool port are entered using the FPWIN GR.
Select “Options” in the menu bar, and then select “PLC Configuration”. Click “COM2 Port”.
Key Point:
The default setting is “Internal USB” for the port selection so that the setting is not necessary
unless the default setting has not been chagned.
To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the USB (COM2) port,
enter the settings for the various items.
Restrictions
The USB (COM2) port supports all the commands of the MEWTOCOL-COM.
There is no restriction.
6-7
6.3.3 USB Connection
The FP-X C30 control unit and C60 control unit is equipped with the USB connector. Connecting the
units with a personal computer using the USB cable enables the communication with our software such
as FPWIN GR. (The FP-X C14 control unit is not equipped with the USB connector.)
It is a communication method that uses the USB as a virtual serial port, so that the FP-X connected with
the USB is treated from the PC as that it is connected via the COM port.
(Note that the USB is equivalent to the serial port.)
Note: The FP-X cannot be connected with the USB cable when using Windows®95.
FPWIN GR: Ver. 2.50 or later version FPWIN GR: Ver. 2.70 or later version
6-8
6.3.4 USB Connection Procedure
This procedure should be performed only once for the first connection. It is not necessary to do
it from the next time.
However, the communication setting must be changed when switching between the USB connection and
the tool port connection.
Note:
Do not connect the FP-X to a PC with the USB cable before the FPWIN GR is installed or during
the installation.
If they are connected, the USB driver will not be installed correctly.
Reference: <6.3.9 Reinstalltion of USB Driver>
Reference:
For the information on the installtion of the FPWIN GR, <FPWIN GR Ver. 2 Operation Guide Book
ARCT1F332>
6-9
6.3.6 Installation of USB Driver
Following 2 USB drivers must be installed to recognize the USB.
• USB driver
• USB-COM conversion driver
Note:
For the PC with more than one connectors, it may be requested to reinstall these 2 drivers if the
positions of the USB connecters are chanaged. In that case, reinstall the drivers.
With Windows® XP
1. Turn on the power suuply of the FP-X, and connect the FP-X with a PC using the USB cable.
2. After the connection, the PC recognize the USB driver automatically. As the following message
is shown, select “No, not this time”, and click “Next”.
6-10
3. The next message is shown. Select “Install the software automatically”, and click “Next”.
6-11
5. The next message is shown and the installation of the USB driver completes. Click “Finish”.
6. After that, the PC recognizes the USB-COM conversion driver automatically. As the next
message is shown, select “No, not this time”, and click “Next”.
6-12
7. The next message is shown. Select “Install the software automatically”, and click “Next”.
6-13
9. The next message is shown and the installation of the USB-COM conversion driver completes.
Click “Finish”.
6-14
With Windows®2000/Windows®Me
After a PC recognized the USB driver, the installtion is started automatically. You do not need to carry
out operation for the installation particularly.
Note that the messages during the installation are not indicated.
2. The next message is shown. Select “Search for the best driver for your device”, and click
“Next”.
6-15
3. Check only “Specify a location”, and input the following folder name in “Specify a location”.
“c:/Program Files/Panasonic MEW Control/FP-X USB”
Uncheck the other boxes, and then click “Next”.
6-16
5. The next message is shown and the installation of the USB driver completes. Click “Finish”.
(It is not necessary to install the USB-COM conversion driver with Windows®98Second Edition.)
6-17
6.3.7 Confirming COM Ports
The USB connected to the FP-X is recognized by the PC as a COM port. It depends on your PC
environment to which COM port the USB is allocated. Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the COM port
number allocated.
In case of Windows®XP
“My computer” → “View System information” → Click “Hardware” tab → Click “Device Manager”.
In case of Windows®2000
“My computer” → “Control panel” → “System” → Click “Hardware” tab → Click “Device manager” →
Click “View” menu→ “Device by type”.
6-18
Procedure for confirming COM ports
1. Display “Device Manager”.
2. Double-click “Ports (COM & LPT)”. As the table of allocation of COM ports, confim the COM
port No.
“CP210x USB to UART Bridge Controller (COM n)” is the allocatead COM port.
Key Point:
COM port No. is necessary for the connection with the FPWIN GR, etc.
Note:
When “? CP210x USB to UART Bridge Controller” in “Other devices” or “Unknown device” is indicated,
the installation has been failed. Reinstall the USB driver.
Reference: <6.3.9 Reinstallation of USB Driver>
6-19
6.3.8 Communication with FPWIN GR
1. Boot up the FPWIN GR.
2. When the FPWIN GR activates, the download select window will open.
Select “Cancel” here.
4. Specify the communication setting as the table below. Once the setting has been completed,
the communication with the USB becomes available.
6-20
6.3.9 Reinstallation of USB Driver
The USB driver must be installed again if the installation was carried out in wrong procedures or
cancelled in the process.
Also, reinstall the driver when the USB connection does not work well.
Reinserting the USB cable displays the window for the installation of the USB driver. Reinstall
the USB driver.
6-21
6.3.10 Restrictions on USB Communication
There are restrictions on the USB communication.
• A personal computer having the USB and with the OS supporting the USB
(Windows®98 Second Edition/ Windows®Me/ Windows®2000/ Windows®XP) to connect the FP-
X using the USB.
• The FP-X connected to the USB is recognized by the PC as that is connected through the COM
port.
• The COM port No. of the COM port allocated for the USB is fixed unless you change the number.
• The USB port is allocated to the COM2 port, and the functions of the communication cassette
are restricted as below.
The USB port is available in the default setting (It is the same when the system registers are
initialized).
When USB port is not used When USB port is used
3-wire 1-channel RS232C
AFPX-COM1 5-wire 1-channel RS232C
(RS and CS control is not available.)
3-wire 1-channel RS232C
AFPX-COM2 3-wire 2-channel RS232C
(The 2nd channel cannot be used.)
AFPX-COM3 No restrictions, 1-channel RS485/RS422
1-channel RS485 1-channel RS485
AFPX-COM4
1-channel RS232C (RS232C cannot be used.)
Ethernet Ethernet
AFPX-COM5
1-channel RS232C (RS232C cannot be used.)
AFPX-COM6 2-channel RS485 1-channel RS485
Note) There is no USB port for the C14 control unit.
• When multiple FP-X are connected to one PC with the USB, it cannot communicates with them
simultaneously. The PC can communication with only the FP-X that was connected first, and
other FP-X cannot communicate.
6-22
Chapter 7
Communication Cassette
7.1 Functions and Types
Note:
There are restrictions on the combination of the USB port and communication cassette (for C30/C60
only).
7-2
7.1.2 Functions of Communication Cassette
With the communication cassette, the FP-X offers four different communication modes as below.
Computer link
• The computer link function is to communicate between a computer and PLCs or between PLC and
external devices connected. A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL-COM is used for
communicating with the computer link. MEWTOCOL-COM is also used for the communication between
the tool software such as FPWIN-GR and the PLC.
• There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link. The
side that issues commands is called master, and the side that receives the commands, executes the
process and sends back responses is called slave.
Note:
It is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this
function.
1. Only the slave function is available for the FP-X relay type Ver1.20 or former version.
2. Both the master and slave functions are available for the FP-X transistor type and relay type Ver1.21
or later version, however, the master function is not available for the TOOL port.
MEWTOCOL master function (Transistor type and relay type Ver1.21 or later version)
• This function is to carry out the communication on the master side (side 0that issues commands) of the
computer link. It is executed with the PLC’s instruction F145(SEND) or F146(RECV). It is not necessary
to write the response process as a ladder, so the program is easier than the general-purpose
communication function.
The 1:1 or 1:N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function
and the MEWTOCOL-COM.
[Our devices (e.g.)] : PLC, IPD, temperature control unit, message runner, eco-power meter
For the MEWTOCOL master function, communication is possible with COM1 port and COM2 port of the
32k type only. Do not execute the F145 (SEND) nor F146 (RECV) instructions when the unti is used as a
slave unit.
7-3
MEWTOCOL slave function
• This function is to receive commands from the computer link, execute the process and send back the
results. Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function. (Set the communication
conditions in the system registers.) It enables the 1:1 or 1:N communication with a master computer or
PLC.
• The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the
MEWTOCOL-COM. MEWTOCOL-COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC
operation.
7-4
PC(PLC) link
The FP-X supports the link system that connects the PC(PLC) link corresponding to the MEWNET-W0
(max. 16 units) with the twisted pair cables.
• In a PC(PLC) link, data is shared with all PLCs connected via MEWNET using dedicated internal relays
called link relays (L) and data registers called link registers (LD).
• If the link relay contact for one PLC goes on, the same link relay also goes on in each of the other
PLCs connected to the network. Likewise, if the contents of a link register are rewritten in one PLC, the
change is made in the same link register of each of the other PLCs connected to the network.
• The status of the link relays and link registers in any one PLC is fed back to all of the other PLCs
connected to the network, so control of data that needs to be consistent throughout the network, such
as target production values and type codes, can easily be implemented to coordinate the data, and the
data of all units are updated at the same time.
- Link relay
In the figure below, when link relay L0 of the master station (no.1) turns on, this signal is converted by
the programs of the other stations, and Y0 of the other stations is activated.
- Link register
In the figure below, if a constant of 100 is written to LD0 of the master station (no.1), the contents of LD0
in the other stations are also changed to a constant of 100.
Only the COM1 port can be used for the PC(PLC) link. (Excluding AFPX-COM5)
7-5
MODBUS RTU
Function overview
• The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FP-X and other devices
(including our FP-e, Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit).
• Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions (command messages) to slave
units and the slave units respond (response messages) according to the instructions.
• Enabels the communication between the devices of max. 99 units as the master function and slave
function is equipped.
• The communication cassette and the USB port can be used.
Master function
Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 (SEND) and F146 (RECV)
instructions.
Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible.
Slave function
If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit, they send back the response
message corresponding to the content.
Do not execute the F145 (SEND) nor F146 (RECV) instructions when the unti is used as a slave unit.
7-6
7.1.3 Communication Cassettes
Name Specifications I/O No. Product No.
FP-X
5-wire type
communication − AFPX-COM1
1-channel RS232C
cassette
FP-X
3-wire type
communication − AFPX-COM2
2-channel RS232C
cassette
FP-X
1-channel
communication − AFPX-COM3
RS485/RS422 (isolated)
cassette
• 1-channel
FP-X
RS485 (isolated)
communication − AFPX-COM4
• 3-wire type
cassette
1-channel RS232C
FP-X • Ethernet
communication • 3-wire type − AFPX-COM5
cassette 1-channel RS232C
• 2-channel RS485
FP-X
(isolated)
communication − AFPX-COM6
(non-isolated between
cassette
channels)
7-7
1-channel RS232C Type (Product No.: AFPX-COM1)
This communication cassette is a 1-channel unit with a non-isolated RS232C port. RS/CS control is
possible.
7-8
1-channel RS485/RS422 Type (Product No.: AFPX-COM3)
This communication cassette is a 1-channel unit with an isolated two-wire RS485/four-wire RS422 port.
7-9
1-channel RS485 and 1-channel RS232C Combination Type (Product No.: AFPX-COM4)
This communication cassette is a 1-channel unit with an isolated two-wire RS485 port and 1-channel unit
with an isolated three-wire RS232C port.
7-10
Ethernet and 1-channel RS232C Combination Type (Product No.: AFPX-COM5)
This communication cassette is a 1-channel unit with an Ethernet interface and an isolated three-wire
RS232C port. Ethernet performs communication at 100 Mbps or 10 Mpbs, but communication between
AFPX-COM5 and FP-X is performed at up to 115200 bps according to the system register setting of FP-
X.
7-11
2-channel RS485 Type (Product No.: AFPX-COM6)
This communication cassette is a 2-channel unit with an isolated two-wire RS485 port.
9600bps
COM2 terminal unit
(Default)
Note) The baud rate for the COM1 port is specified only by the system
register. However, for the COM2 port, it should be specified by
the switches and the system register.
7-12
7.1.4 Examples of Connection
AFPX-COM1: 1-channel 5-wire RS232C
Note) When the device to connect is a three-wire type, the RS of the COM 1 port should be connected to
the CS.
Using RS422
Note) There are several names for the signal names of RS422. Confirm with the instruction manuals for
each device.
7-13
AFPX-COM4: 1-channel RS485 and 1-channel 3-wire RS232C
7-14
7.1.5 Names and Principle Applications of the Ports
Port type
Port name Communication function
USB is used USB is not used
Fitted with the main unit as a standard
Computer link
Tool port equipment
General-purpose serial communication
(Mini-DIN 5-pin connector)
Computer link
Communication cassette General-purpose serial communication
COM1 port Note)
PC(PLC) link
Communication MODBUS RTU
Fitted with the main unit as cassette
Computer link
a standard equipment
COM2 port General-purpose serial communication
USB port
MODBUS RTU
(For C30/C60 only)
Note) There are restrictions of use on the communication cassette when using the USB port (refer to the
next page).
The PC (PLC) link cannot be used with the AFPX-COM5.
7-15
7.2 Communication Specifications
General-purpose serial
Computer link Note1) MODBUS RTU Note1)
communication Note1)
PC(PLC)
1:N 1:N 1:N
1:1 1:1 link 1:1
commu- commu- commu-
communication communication communication
nication nication nication
RS232C
Inter-
RS232C RS422 RS485 RS232C RS422 RS485 RS422 RS232C RS422 RS485
face
RS485
-TOOL -TOOL AFPX
port AFPX port AFPX -COM1 AFPX AFPX
Target AFPX AFPX -COM3 AFPX AFPX -COM3 -COM2 -COM1 AFPX -COM3
items -COM1 -COM3 -COM4 -COM1 -COM3 -COM4 -COM3 -COM2 -COM3 -COM4
-COM2 -COM6 -COM2 -COM6 -COM4 -COM4 -COM6
-COM4 -COM4 -COM6
Two-wire, Two-wire, Two-wire,
Token
Commu- half- half- half-
Half-duplex Half-duplex bus Half-duplex
nication duplex duplex duplex
communication communication (Floating communication
method communi- communi- communi-
master)
cation cation cation
Note1) Although it has adequate tolerance to noise,it is recommendable to make the user program to
execute retransmission(in order to improve reliability of the communication when a
communication error occurs due to excessive noises or when a receiver equipment cannot
receive data temporarily).
7-16
Communication specifications 1 Interface: RS232C, RS422, RS485
Item Specifications
RS232C RS422 (isolated)
Interface Note1) RS485 (isolated) Note1) 2)
(non-isolated)
Communication mode 1:1 communicaion 1:N communication
Two-wire half-duplex
Communication method Half-duplex communication
communication
Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system
Shielded twisted-pair cable
Transmission line Multicore shielded line
or VCTF
Transmission distance 15 m Max. 1200 m Note1) Max. 1200 m Note1) 2)
Baud rate Note3)
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
(to be set by system register) Note8)
Computer link ASCII, JIS7, JIS8
Trans-
General-purpose
mission ASCII, JIS7, JIS8, Binary
serial communication
code
MODBUS RTU Binary
Communication Data length 7 bits/8 bits
format Parity None/Even/Odd
(to be set by Stop bit 1 bit/2 bits
system register) Start code STX/No STX
Note4)
End code CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
Max. 99 units
No. of connected units Note5) 6) 7) 2 units (max. 32 units when C-NET
adapter is connected.)
Note1) When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface, please confirm
operation using the actual device. In some cases, the number of units, transmission distance,
and baud rate vary depending on the connected device.
Note2) The values for the transmission distance, baud rate and number of units should be within the
values noted in the graph below.
When using a baud rate of 300 bps to 38400 bps, you can set up to a maximum of 99 units
(stations) and maximum transmission distance of 1200 m.
Note3) Only 9600 bps or 19200 bps can be specified when the C-NET adapter is connected with the
RS485 interface.
Note4) The start code and end code can be used only in the general-purpose serial communication
mode.
Note5) The converter SI-35 manufactured by Lineeye Co., Ltd is recommendable for the RS485 at the
computer side. Adjust the response time for the FP-X by the SYS1 instruction if necessary.
Note6) Unit numbers should be registered by the system register.
Note7) The termination resistance of the RS485/RS422 in the COM3,COM4 and COM6 is specified by
the dip switch in the communication cassette.
There is no termination resistance at the RS232C port.
7-17
Note8) The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS instruction only (Ver 2.0 or
later).
7-18
7.2.1 Precaution When Using RS485 Port
AFPX-COM3, AFPX-COM4
SYS1 instruction is available for FP-X, which enables to change the time after receiving a command until
a response is returned.
With the converter SI-35 manufactured by Lineeye Co., Ltd in the RS485 communication, adjust the
response time by this instruction if necessary.
SYS1 instruction: This is to delay a response for [n] scan time to be specified.
Example:
When R0 turns on, the response of COM1 port (RS485 port) delays for two scans. If the scan time is
500µs, it delays for 1 ms.
7-19
7.3 Communication Function 1: Computer Link
Computer link
• The computer link function is to communicate between a computer and PLCs or between PLC and
external devices connected. A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL-COM is used for
communicating with the computer link. MEWTOCOL-COM is also used for the communication between
the tool software such as FPWIN-GR and the PLC.
• There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link. The
side that issues commands is called master, and the side that receives the commands, executes the
process and sends back responses is called slave.
Note:
It is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this
function.
1. Only the slave function is available for the FP-X relay type Ver 1.20 or former version.
2. Both the master and slave functions are available for the FP-X transistor tyep and relay type (Ver 1.21
or later version), however, the master function is not available for the TOOL port.
7-20
MEWTOCOL master function (Transistor type, relay type Ver 1.21 or later version)
• This function is to carry out the communication on the master side (side 0that issues commands) of the
computer link. It is executed with the PLC’s instruction F145(SEND) or F146(RECV). It is not necessary
to write the response process as a ladder, so the program is easier than the general-purpose
communication function.
The 1:1 or 1:N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function
and the MEWTOCOL-COM.
[Our devices (e.g.)] : PLC, IPD, temperature control unit, message runner, eco-power meter
For the MEWTOCOL master function, communication is possible with COM1 port and CCOM2 port of
the 32k type only. Do not execute the F145 (SEND) nor F146 (RECV) instructions when the unti is used
as a slave unit.
7-21
Outline of operation when using computer link (MEWTOCOL slave)
Command and response
• Instructions issued by the computer to the PLC are called commands. Messages sent back to the
computer from the PLC are called responses. When the PLC receives a command, it processes the
command regardless of the sequence program, and sends a response back to the computer.
MEWTOCOL-COM sketch
• Communication is carried out in a conversational format, based on the MEWTOCOL-COM
communication procedures.
• Data is sent in ASCII format.
• The computer has the first right of transmission. The right of transmission shifts back and forth
between the computer and the PLC each time a message is sent.
7-22
Format of command and response
Command message
All command-related items should be noted in the text segment. The unit number must be specified
before sending the command.
2. Unit number
The unit number of the PLC to which you want to send the command must be specified. In 1:1
communication, the unit number “01” (ASCII code: H3031) should be specified. The unit No. of the PLC
is specified by the system register.
3. Text
The content differs depending on the command. The content should be noted in all upper-case
characters, following the fixed formula for the particular command.
4. Check code
BCC (block check code) for error detection using horizontal parity. The BCC should be created so that it
targets all of the text data from the header to the last text character. The BCC starts from the header and
checks each character in sequence, using the exclusive OR operation, and replaces the final result with
character text. It is normally part of the calculation program and is created automatically.
The parity check can be skipped by entering “* *” (ASCII code: H2A2A) instead of the BCC.
7-23
Note: When writing
• The method for writing text segments in the message varies depending on the type of command.
• If there is a large number of characters to be written, they may be divided and sent as several
commands. If there is a large number of characters in the value that was loaded, they may be divided
and several responses sent.
Key Point:
• With the FP-X, an expansion header “<” is supported to send single frames of up to 2048 characters as
well as general “%”.
Type of header No. of characters that can be sent in 1 frame
% Max. 118 characters
< Max. 2048 characters
Response message
The PLC that received the command in the example above sends the processing results to the computer.
2. Unit number
The unit number of the PLC that processed the command is stored here.
3. Text
The content of this varies depending on the type of command. The value should be read based on the
content. If the processing is not completed successfully, an error code will be stored here, so that the
content of the error can be checked.
7-24
4. Check code
BCC (block check code) for error detection using horizontal parity. The BCC starts from the header and
checks each character in sequence, using the exclusive OR operation, and replaces the final result with
character text.
7-25
Commands to be used
Command name Code Description
RC Reads the on and off status of contacts.
(RCS) - Specifies only one point.
Read contact area
(RCP) - Specifies multiple contacts.
(RCC) - Specifies a range in word units.
WC Turns contacts on and off.
(WCS) - Specifies only one point.
Write contact area
(WCP) - Specifies multiple contacts.
(WCC) - Specifies a range in word units.
Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area.
Write data area WD Writes data to a data area.
Read timer/counter set value area RS Reads the timer/counter setting value.
Write timer/counter set value area WS Writes the timer/counter setting value.
Read timer/counter elapsed value area RK Reads the timer/counter elapsed value.
Write timer/counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer/counter elapsed value.
Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored.
Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored.
Monitors a registered contact or data using MD
Monitoring start MG
and MC.
Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16-
Preset contact area (fill command) SC
point on and off pattern.
Writes the same contents to the data area of a
Preset data area (fill command) SD
specified range.
Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register.
Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register.
Reads the specifications of the programmable
Read the status of PLC RT
controller and error codes if an error occurs.
Switches the operation mode of the
Remote control RM
programmable controller.
Abort AB Aborts communication.
7-26
Setting communication parameters
Setting for Baud rate and communication format
The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM port are entered using the FPWIN GR.
Select “Options” in the menu bar, and then select “PLC Configuration”. Click “COM Port”. There are
separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2 .
Note:
• As the default of the COM2 port is “Internal USB”, select “COM. cassette”.
• When the MEWTOCOL master is used, also select “Computer Link”.
No. 410 (for COM1 port), No. 411 (for COM2 port) unit number
The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99.
No. 413 (for COM1 port), No. 414 (for COM2 port) Communication Format setting
Default setting:
Char. Bit …………… 8 bits
Parity ………………. Odd
Stop Bit ……………. 1 bit
Terminator ………… CR
Header …………….. STX not exist
To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the COM port, enter the
settings for the various items.
Restrictions
The COM port of the communication cassette supports all the commands of the MEWTOCOL-COM.
There is no restriction.
7-27
7.3.2 1:1 Communication (Computer link)
System register settings
Settings for COM1 port (AFP-COM1, AFPX-COM2, AFPX-COM3, AFPX-COM5)
No. Name Set Value
No. 410 Unit number COM1 port 1
No. 412 Note) Communication mode COM1 port Computer link
No. 413 Communication format for COM1 port Data length: …… 7 bits/8 bits
Parity check: ….. None/Odd/Even
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit/2 bit
Terminator: …….. CR
Header: ………… No STX
No. 415 Note) Baud rate setting for COM1 port 2400 to 115200 bps
Programming
• For a computer link, a program should be created that allows command messages to be sent and
response messages to be received on the computer side. No communication program is required on
the PLC side. (Specify the communciation format only by the system register.)
• Create the program on the PC side using Basic language or C language according to the
MEWTOCOL-COM. Commands to monitor and control the operation of the PLC are provided in the
MEWTOCOL-COM.
Key Point:
• Using our sfotware Control CommX enables the communication on Visual Basic.
• An add-in software “PCWAY” to be used with a spreadsheet software “Excel” is avaiable to collect data.
7-28
Connection to the computer <1:1 communication>
Overview
For a 1:1 computer link between the FP-X and a computer, an RS232C cable is needed. Communication
is performed via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC.
Note) There are several names for the signal names of RS422. Confirm with the instruction manuals for each devices.
7-29
1:1 communication with programmable display GT series
Overview
A 1:1 computer link with a programmable display connects the FP-X and the programmable display
using an RS232C cable. Communication is performed via commands from the programmable display
and responses from the PLC.
No program is required for communication. Simply set the mutual communications settings to operate
the PLC via the programmable display.
Note) It is recommended to connect the programmable display (GT01) with a tool port.
7-30
7.3.3 1:N Communication (Computer Link)
Overview
For a 1:N computer link, the computer and the FP-X are connected through a commercially available
RS232C-RS485 converter, and the respective PLCs are wired using an RS485 cable.
The computer and the PLC communicate via commands and responses: The computer sends a
command specifying the unit number, and the PLC with that unit number sends a response back to the
computer.
7-31
Setting of unit numbers
By default, the unit number for each communication port is set to 1 in the system register settings. There
is no need to change this for 1:1 communication, but if 1:N communication is used to connect multiple
PLCs to the transmission line (e.g. in a C-NET), the unit number must be specified so that the
destination of the command can be identified.
The unit number is specified by using the system register.
No. 410 (for COM1 port), No. 411 (for COM2 port) unit number settings
Click on , and select a unit number from 1 to 99.
Note) With a C-NET adapter, a maximum of 32 units (stations) can be specified.
7-32
Connection with external devices
AFPX-COM3 (when setting RS485)
Connection diagram
With 1:N communication, the various RS485 devices are connected using twisted pair cables. Use only
one (+) and (-) terminals.
AFPX-COM4
Connection diagram
In case of using the AFPX-COM4, connect two cables each to the (+) terminal and (-) terminal.
Use the wires of the same cross-sectional area which should be 0.5 mm2.
AFPX-COM6
Connection diagram
In case of using the AFPX-COM6, connect two cables each to the (+) terminal and (-) terminal.
Use the wires of the same cross-sectional area which should be 0.5 mm2.
Note) Non-insulated between the COM1 and COM2.
Reference:
For the information on the switch, <7.1.3 Type of Communication Cassettes, AFPX-COM3/COM4>
7-33
7.3.4 MEWTOCOL Master (Sample Program)
Use the F145 (SEND) “Data send” or F146 (RECV) “Data receive” instruction to use the MEWTOCOL
master function.
Note: Available for the transistor type and relay type Ver 1.21 or later version only.
Sample program
Note) The above COM1 port will be COM2 port for the COM2 port.
7-35
7.4 Communication Function 2: General-purpose Serial
Communication
Outline of operation
To send data to and receive it from an external device using the general-purpose serial communication
function, the data transmission and data reception functions described below are used. The F159
(MTRN) instruction and the “reception done” flag are used in these operations, to transfer data between
the FPΣ and an external device.
Sending data
Data to be transmitted from the PLC is stored in the data register used as the send buffer (DT). When
F159 (MTRN) is executed, the data is output from the COM port.
• The terminator specified in the system
register is automatically added to the data
that has been sent.
• The maximum volume of data that can be
sent is 2048 bytes.
Receiving data
Data received from the COM port is stored in the receive buffer specified in the system register, and the
“reception done” flag goes on. Data can be received whenever the “reception done” flag is off.
• When data is being received, the “reception
done” flag is controlled by the F159 (MTRN)
instruction.
• No terminator is included in the stored data.
• The maximum volume of data that can be
received is 4096 bytes.
7-36
Setting communication parameters in the general-purpose serial communication mode
By default, the COM port is set to “Computer link”. System register settings should be entered for the
following items.
The settings for baud rate and communication format are made using the FPWIN GR programming tool.
Select “Options” in the menu bar, and then select “PLC Configuration”. Click “COM Port”. There are
separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2.
No. 413 (for COM1 port), No. 414 (for COM2 port) Communication Format setting
Default setting:
Char. Bit …………… 8 bits
Parity ………………. Odd
Stop Bit ……………. 1 bit
Terminator ………… CR
Header …………….. STX not exist
Enter the appropriate settings to match the communication format of the external device connected to
the COM port..
No. 416 (for COM1 port), No. 418 (for COM2 port) Starting address for data received
No. 417 (for COM1 port), No. 419 (for COM2 port) Buffer capacity setting for data received
To change this area, specify the starting address using system register no. 416 (no. 418 for COM2 port)
and the volume (number of words) using no. 417 (no. 419 for COM2 port). The receive buffer layout is
shown below.
7-37
7.4.2 Communication with External Devices
Programming example of general-purpose serial communication
The F159 (MTRN) instruction is used to send and receive data via the specified COM port. F159 (MTRN)
F144 (TRNS) instruction is not available with the FP-X.
Devices that can be specified for S: Only data registers (DT) can be specified as the send buffer.
Devices that can be specified for n: WX, WY, WR, WL, SV, EV, DT, LD, I (I0 to ID), K, H
Devices that can be specified for D: Only the K constants (only K1 and K2)
Sending data
The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data
table, starting with the area specified by S, through the COM port specified by D. Data can be sent with
the header and terminator automatically attached. A maximum of 2048 bytes can be sent. When the
above program is run, the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 and stored in the send buffer
starting from DT100 are sent from COM1 port.
Receiving data
Reception of data is controlled by turning the “reception done” flags R9038/R9048 on and off. The
received data is stored in the receive buffe specified in the system register. Data can be received when
F159 (MTRN) turns the “reception done” flag off. When the reception of the data is completed (the
terminator is received), the “reception done” flag turns on, and subsequently, receiving data is prohibited.
To receive the next data, execute the F159 (MTRN) instruction and turn the “reception done” flag off to
clear the number of received bytes to 0. To receive data continuously without sending data, clear the
number of transmitted bytes to 0 (set “n” to “K0”), and then execute the F159 (MTRN) instruction.
Binary communication
Selecting “STX not exist” for the header and “None” for the terminator in the general-purpose serial
communication enables the binary communication.
Sending data: Sends the data of bytes to be specified.
Receiving data: Check the No. of bytes received before the process. At that time, the reception done flag
does not work.
7-38
Sending data to external devices
Communication with external devices is handled through the data registers.
Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the send buffer (DT), and when the F159 (MTRN)
instruction is executed, the data is output from the COM port.
Explanatory diagram
7-39
Explanation of data table
The data table for transmission starts at the data register specified in S.
• Use an F0 (MV) or F95 (ASC) instruction to write the data to be transmitted to the transmission data
storage area specified in S.
Transmission process
When the execution condition of the F159 (MTRN) instruction turns on and the “transmission done” flag
R9039/R9049 is on, operation is as follows:
1. N is preset in S. The “reception done” flag R9038/R9048 is turned off, and the reception data number
is cleared to 0.
2. The set data is transmitted in order from the lower-order byte in S+1 of the table.
• During transmission, the “transmission done” flag R9039/R9049 turns off.
• If system register 413 or 414 is set to header (start code) with STX, the header is automatically added
to the beginning of the data.
• The terminator (end code) specified in system register 413 or 414 is automatically added to the end of
the data.
3. When all of the specified quantity of data has been transmitted, the S value is cleared to 0 and the
“transmission done” flag R9039/R9049 turns on.
When you do not wish to add the terminator (end code) during transmissions:
• Specify the number of bytes to be transmitted using a negative number.
• If you also do not wish to add a terminator to received data, set system register 413 or 414 to
“Terminator - None”.
Programming example:
The following program transmits 8 bytes of data without adding the terminator.
Key Point:
• Do not include the terminator (end code) in the transmission data. The terminator is added
automatically.
• When “STX exist” is specified for the header (start code) in system register 413 or 414, do not add the
header to the transmission data. The header is added automatically.
• When using the AFPX-COM1, transmission does not take place until CS (Clear to Send) turns on. If
you are not going to connect to the other device, connect to RS (Request to Send).
• The maximum number of transmission bytes n is 2048.
• The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port.
7-40
Receiving data from external devices
Data input from the COM port is stored in the
receive buffer specified by the system register,
and the “reception done” flag goes on. If the
“reception done” flag is off, data can be received
at any time.
Note:
• Be aware that the “reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 changes even while a scan is in progress
(e.g., if the “reception done” flag is used multiple times as an input condition, there is a possibility of
different statuses existing within the same scan.) To prevent multiple read access to the special internal
relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program.
Explanatory diagram
7-41
Explanation of data table
Data sent from an external device connected to the COM port is stored in the data registers that have
been set as the receive buffer.
• Specify the data registers in system register 416 to
419.
• The number of bytes of data received is stored in the
starting address of the receive buffer. The initial value
is 0.
• Received data is stored in the received data storage
area in order from the lower -order byte.
Reception process
When the “reception done” flag R9038 (R9048) is off, operation takes place as follows when data is sent
from an external device. (The R9038 (R9048) flag is off during the first scan after RUN).
1. Incoming data is stored in order from the lower-order byte of the 2nd-word area of the receive buffer.
Header and terminator (start and end codes) are not stored.
2. When the terminator (end code) is received, the “reception done” flag R9038 (R9048) turns on.
Reception of any further data is prohibited. When the terminator has been set to “None”, the “reception
done” flag does not turn on. Check the number of received bytes to judge whehter the reception has
completed or not.
3. When an F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the “reception done” flag R9038 (R9048) turns off
(except the case when the terminator has been set to “None”), the number of received bytes is cleared,
and subsequent data is stored in order from the lower-order byte.
Key Point:
• The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port.
7-42
Data to be sent/received with FP-X
Remember the following when accessing data in the FP-X send and receive buffers:
• If a header has been chosen in the communication format settings, the code STX (H02) will
automatically be added at the beginning of the data begin sent.
• The data without the Code STX at the reception is stored in the receive buffer, and the “reception
done” flag turns on when the terminator (end code) is received. When the terminator has been set to
“None”, the “reception done” flag does not work.
However, if the code STX is added in the middle of the data, the number of received byte is cleared to
0, and the data is stored from the beginning of the receive buffer again.
• A terminator is automatically added to the end of the data being sent.
• There is no terminator on the data stored in the receive buffer.
Sending data:
Data written to the send buffer will be sent just as it is.
Example:
The data “12345” is transmitted as an ASCII code to an external device.
1. Data sent using the F95 (ASC) instruction should be converted to ASCII code data.
2. If DT100 is being used as the send buffer, data will be stored in sequential order in the data registers
starting from the next register (DT101), in two-byte units consisting of the upper and the lower byte.
Receiving data:
The data of the receive area being read is ASCII code data.
Example:
The data “12345CR” is transmitted from a device with RS232C port.
• If DT200 is being used as the receive buffer, received data will be stored in the registers starting from
DT201, in sequential order of first the lower byte and then the upper byte.
7-43
Flag operation in serial communication
Header: No-STX, Terminator: CR
Receiving data:
The “reception done” flag, the “transmission done” flag, and the F159 (MTRN) instruction are related as
follows:
Note:
• Be aware that the “reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 changes even while a scan is in progress
(e.g., if the “reception done” flag is used multiple times as an input condition, there is a possibility of
different statuses existing within the same scan.) To prevent multiple read access to the special internal
relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program.
Key Point:
• The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port.
7-44
Header: STX, Terminator: ETX
Receiving data:
The “reception done” flag, the “transmission done” flag, and the F159 (MTRN) instruction are related as
follows:
• The data is stored in the receive buffer in sequential order. When the header is received, the number of
bytes received is cleared, and the address (write pointer) in the receive buffer is reset to the initial
address.
• Reception is disabled while the “reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 is on.
• Also, When F159 (MTRN) is executed, the number of bytes received is cleared, and the address (write
pointer) in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address.
• If there are two headers, data following the second header overwrites the data in the receive buffer.
• The “reception done” flag R9038 or R9048 is turned off by the F159 (MTRN) instruction. Therefore, if
F159 (MTRN) is executed at the same time the terminator is received, the “reception done” flag will not
be detected.
7-45
Sending data:
The “reception done” flag, the “transmission done” flag, and the F159 (MTRN) instruction are related as
follows:
• Header (STX) and terminator (ETX) are automatically added to the data being transmitted. The data is
transmitted to an external device.
• When the F159 (MTRN) instruction is executed, the “transmission done” flag R9039 or R9049 goes off.
• Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 (MTRN) is being executed. The “transmission done” flag
R9039 or R9049 must be observed.
Key Point:
• The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port.
7-46
Changing communication mode of COM port
An F159 (MTRN) instruction can be executed to change between general-purpose serial communication
mode and computer link mode. To do so, specify H8000 for n (the number of transmission bytes) and
execute the instruction.
The COM port communication mode flag in R9032 or R9042 turns on when general-purpose serial
communication mode is selected.
Note:
• When the power is turned on, the operating mode selected in system register no. 412 takes effect.
It is not possible to change to the MODBUS RTU mode.
7-47
7.4.3 Connection with 1:1 Communication (General-purpose serial
communication)
System register settings
Settings for COM1 port (AFPX-COM1, AFPX-COM2, AFPX-COM3, AFPX-COM5)
No. Name Set Value
No. 412 Selection of communication mode for General-purpose serial communication
COM1 port
No. 413 Communication format for COM1 port Data length: …… 7 bits/8 bits
Parity check: ….. None/Odd/Even
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit/2 bits
Terminator: …….. CR/CR+LF/None/ETX
Header: ………… No STX/STX
No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port Note2) 2400 to 115200 bps
No. 416 Starting address for receive buffer for DT0 to DT32764 (Initial value: DT0) Note1)
COM1 port
No. 417 Receive buffer capacity for COM1 port 0 to 2048 words (Initial value: 2048 words)
Note1) When using the C14, the values are DT0 to DT12285.
Note2) The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction (Ver 2.0 or
more). However, the setting value of the system register cannot be changed.
Note3) The setting values for the COM2 port of AFPX-COM6 are 9600 bps, 19200 bps and 115200 bps
only. The same baud rate should be specified by the cassette backside switch and the system
register.
7-48
1:1 communication with Micro-Imagechecker
Overview
The FP-X and Micro-Imagechecker A200/A100 are connected using an RS232C cable. The results of
the scan are stored in the data registers of the FP-X.
• After the scan start code “%SCR” has been sent from the FP-X side, the scan result is returned from the
Micro-Imagechecker as the response.
Key Point:
• If “Del” is specified for the invalid processing parameter, zero suppression processing will be carried
out on the output data, and the output format will be changed. Always make sure “Repl. 0” is specified.
• When outputting data to an external device, numerical calculation is required, so “Out” should be
specified for the “Numerical calculation” parameter.
• With the above settings, the following data will be output from the Micro-Imagechecker.
7-49
Connection to Micro-Imagechecker A200/A100
<Using AFPX-COM1> 1-channel RS232C type
<Using AFPX-COM4> 1-channel RS485 type and 1-channel RS232C type in combination
7-50
Procedure of communication
In the following example, the Micro-Imagechecker is connected to COM1 port.
7-51
Sample program
In the following example, the Micro-Imagechecker is connected to COM1 port.
Buffer statuses
The following shows the statuses of the send and receive buffers when the sample program is run.
7-52
1:1 communication with FP Series PLC
Overview
Connect the FP-X and another FP series PLC using the RS232C interface and the MEWTOCOL-COM
communication protocol.
• When the data area read command “%01#RDD00000 00001**CR” is sent from the FP-X side, the
values of the data register of the PLC connected to the system are sent as a response. For example, if
the value K100 is stored in DT0 and the value K200 is stored in DT1 of the PLC,
“%01$RD6400C8006F CR” is sent as a response to the command. If there is an error, “%01!○○** CR” is
returned (○○ is the error code).
• In addition to data area read and write commands, MEWTOCOL-COM also provides contact area read
and write as well as many other commands.
7-53
Connection to FP series PLCs (FP0)
<Using AFPX-COM1> 1-channel RS232C type
- Connection with FP0 COM port
7-54
Procedure of communication
In this example, an FP series PLC is connected to COM1 port. K100 and K200 are respectively being
stored in DT0 and DT1 of the PLC on the other end.
7-55
Sample program
In the following example, the FP series PLC is connected to COM1 port.
Buffer statuses
The tables below show the statuses of the send and receive buffers when the sample program is run.
7-56
Key Point:
Contents of the response:
If K100 is stored in DT0 and K200 is stored in DT1 of the FP series PLC on the other end,
“%01$RD6400C8006FCR” is returned from the FP series PLC on the other end as the response when
the program is executed. The received data is stored in the data registers as shown below.
Extracting the data register values from the PLC on the other end
In the program, the data segment of the response from the PLC on the other end is converted to
hexadecimal data using the F72 (AHEX) (hexadecimal ASCII → hexadecimal data conversion)
instruction and stored in DT50 and DT51, only if the character string “$1” stored in DT1 is detected as a
comparison instruction
If an error occurs, “%01!○○□□CR” is returned as the response (○○ is the error code and □□ is the
BCC).
7-57
The values of DT50 and DT51 are written in DT0 and 1 of PLC.
7-58
7.4.4 1:N Communication (General-purpose Serial Communication)
Overview
The FP-X and the external units are connected using an RS485 cable. Using the protocol that matches
the external units, the F159 (MTRN) instruction is used to send and receive data.
7-59
7.5 Communication Function 3: PC(PLC) Link
7-60
Operation of PLC link
• Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same
network.
• Likewise, if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed, the values of the same link register
are changed in all PLCs on the same network.
7-61
7.5.2 Setting Communication Parameters
Setting of communication mode
In the default settings, the COM1 port is set to computer link mode.
Set the communication mode using the FPWIN GR programming tool. Select “PLC Configuration” under
“Options”, and then click “COM1 port” tab. (The PC(PLC) link is available for COM1 port only.)
Key Point:
• When using a PC(PLC) link, the communication format and baud rate are fixed:
No. Name Set Value
No. 413 Communication format for COM Data length: …… 8 bits
1port Parity check: ….. Odd
Stop bit: ………… 1 bit
Terminator: …….. CR
Header: ………… STX not exist
No. 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 115200 bps
Note1) The terminal units of AFPX-COM3 and AFPX-COM4 are specified by the dip switch located in the
communication cassette.
7-62
Setting of unit numbers
By default, the unit number for the communication port is set to 1 in the system registers.
In a PC(PLC) link that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line, the unit number must be
set in order to identify the different PLCs.
The unit number is specified either by using the SYS1 instruction or the system register.
Unit numbers are the numbers to identify the different PLCs on the same network. The same number
must not be used for more than one PLC on the same network.
Note:
When using the PC(PLC) link with the RS232C/RS422, the number of units is 2.
7-63
Setting with the system register
Set the unit numbers using the FPWIN GR programming tool. Select “PLC Configuration” under
“Options”, and then select “COM1 port” tab.
Dialog box of PLC system register setting
7-64
Link area allocation
• The link relays and link registers to be used in the PC(PLC) link are allocated in the link area of the
CPU unit. Link area allocations are specified by setting the system registers of the CPU unit.
System registers
No. Name Default Set value
value
40 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 64 words
41 Range of link data registers used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 128 words
42 Starting number for link relay transmission 0 0 to 63
For 43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
PC 44 Starting number for link data register tranmission 0 0 to 127
(PLC) 45 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 128 words
link 0 46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal: 1st half
Reverse: 2nd half
Note)
47 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET-W0 16 1 to 16
PC(PLC) link
46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal: 1st half
Reverse: 2nd half
50 Range of link relays used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 64 words
For 51 Range of link data registers used for PC(PLC) link 0 0 to 128 words
PC 52 Starting number for link relay transmission 64 64 to 127
(PLC) 53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
link 1 54 Starting number for link data register tranmission 128 128 to 255
55 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 128 words
Note)
57 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET-W0 16 1 to 16
PC(PLC) link
Note) The same maximum unit number should be specified for all the PLCs connected in the PC(PLC)
link.
• Link areas consist of link relays and link registers, and are divided into areas for PC(PLC) link 0 and
PC(PLC) link 1 and used with those units.
• The link relay which can ben used in an area for either PC(PLC) link 0 or PC(PLC) link 1 is maximum
1024 points (64 words), and the link register is maximum 128 words.
Note:
The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link W0 of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit
(MCU). At that time, the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same
values as the FP2 (from WL64, from LD128).
Reference:
For the information on FP2-MCU, <Chapter 5 Communication Function PC(PLC) Link in FP2 Multi
Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E>.
7-65
Example of allocation
The areas for PC(PLC) link are divided into send areas and receive areas. The link relays and link
registers are sent from the send area to the receive area of a different PLC. Link relays and link registers
with the same numbers as those on the transmission side must exist in the receive area on the receiving
side.
System registers
Setting for various units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
40 Range of link relays used 64 64 64 64
42 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 0 20 40 0
43 Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 0
Note) No. 40 (range of link relays used) must be set to the same range for all the units.
System registers
Setting for various units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
41 Range of link registers used 128 128 128 128
44 Starting No. for link register transmission 0 40 80 0
45 Link register transmission size 40 40 48 0
Note) No. 41 (range of link registers used) must be set to the same range for all the units.
When link areas are allocated as shown above, the No. 1 send area can be sent to the No. 2, No. 3 and
No. 4 receive areas. Also, the No. 1 receive area can receive data from the No. 2 and No. 3 send areas.
No. 4 is allocated as a receive area only, and can receive data from No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3, but cannot
transmit it to other stations.
7-66
For PC(PLC) link 1
Link relay allocation
System registers
Setting for various units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
50 Range of link relays used 64 64 64 64
52 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 64 84 104 64
53 Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 0
Note) No. 50 (range of link relays used) must be set to the same range for all the units.
System registers
Setting for various units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
51 Range of link registers used 128 128 128 128
54 Starting No. for link register transmission 128 128 208 128
55 Link register transmission size 40 40 48 0
Note) No. 51 (range of link registers used) must be set to the same range for all the units.
When link areas are allocated as shown above, the No. 1 send area can be sent to the No. 2, No. 3 and
No. 4 receive areas. Also, the No. 1 receive area can receive data from the No. 2 and No. 3 send areas.
No. 4 is allocated as a receive area only, and can receive data from No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3, but cannot
transmit it to other stations.
Note:
The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link W0 of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit
(MCU). At that time, the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same
values as the FP2 (from WL64, from LD128).
Reference:
For the information on FP2-MCU, <Chapter 5 Communication Function PC(PLC) Link in FP2 Multi
Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E>.
7-67
Partial use of link areas
In the link areas available for PC(PLC) link, link relays with a total of 1024 points (64 words) and link
registers with a total of 128 words can be used. This does not mean, however, that it is necessary to
reserve the entire area. Parts of the area which have not been reserved can be used as internal relays
and internal registers.
7-68
Note: Precautions When Allocating Link Areas
If a mistake is made when allocating a link area, be aware that an error will result, and communication
will be disalbed.
System registers
Set value of various control units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
No. 40 Range of link relays used 64 64 64
No. 42 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 0 20 30
No. 43 Link relay transmission size 20 20 34
Invalid allocations
The allocations shown below are not possible, neither for link relays nor for link registers:
7-69
Setting the largest unit number for a PC(PLC) link
The largest unit number can be set using system register no. 47 (using system register no. 57 for
PC(PLC) link 1).
[Sample setting]
No. of units linked Setting contents
2 1st unit: Unit no. 1 is set
2nd unit: Unit no. 2 is set
A largest unit no. of 2 is set for each.
4 1st unit: Unit no. 1 is set
2nd unit: Unit no. 2 is set
3rd unit: Unit no. 3 is set
4th unit: Unit no. 4 is set
A largest unit no. of 4 is set for each.
n Nth unit: Unit no. n is set
A largest unit no. of n is set for each.
Note:
• Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively, starting from 1, with no breaks between
them. If there is a missing unit number, the transmission time will be longer.
• If fewer than 16 units are linked, the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit
number in system register no. 47 (in system register no. 57 for PC(PLC) link 1).
• For all PLCs which are linked, the same value should be set for the largest unit number.
• If there are fewer than 16 units linked and the largest unit number has not been set (default=16), or the
largest unit number has been set but the unit number settings are not consecutive, or the unit number
settings are consecutive but there is a unit for which the power supply has not been turned on, the
response time for the PC(PLC) link (the link transmission cycle) will be longer.
7-70
7.5.3 Monitoring
When using a PC(PLC) link, the operation status of the links can be monitored using the following relays.
Note:
Remote programming of the linked PLCs is not possible.
7-71
7.5.4 Connection Example of PC(PLC) Link
When using three PLCs
In the example shown here, link relays are use. When X1 of PLC with unit no. 1 turns on, Y0 of PLC with
unit no. 2 turns on. When X2 of PLC with unit no. 1 turns on, Y0 of PLC with unit no. 3 turns on.
Key Point:
Make sure the same unit number is not used for more than one of the PLCs connected through the
PC(PLC) link function, and specify consecutive numbers.
7-72
Link area allocation
- Link relay allocation
System registers
Set value of various control units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
No. 40 Range of link relays used 64 64 64
No. 42 Starting No. of word for link relay transmission 0 20 40
No. 43 Link relay transmission size 20 20 24
System registers
Set value of various control units
No. Name
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
No. 41 Range of link registers used 128 128 128
No. 44 Starting No. for link register transmission 0 40 80
No. 45 Link register transmission size 40 40 48
7-73
Sample program
- Unit no. 1
When X1 is input, L0 of the link relay goes on, and when X2 is input, L1 of the link relay goes on.
- Unit no. 2
When L0 of the link relay goes on, Y0 is output.
- Unit no. 3
When L1 of the link relay goes on, Y0 is output.
7-74
7.5.5 PC(PLC) Link Response Time
The maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle can be calculated using the following
formula.
Tpc = Ttx (sending time per byte) x Pcm (PLC link sending size)
Ttx = 1/(baud rate x 1000) x 11 ms …. Approx. 0.096 ms at 115.2 kbps
Pcm = 23 + (number of relay words + number of register words) x 4
↓ Tlk (link addition processing time) …. If no stations are being added, Tlk = 0.
Tlk = Tlc (link addition command sending time) + Twt (addition waiting time) + Tls (sending time for
command to stop transmission if link error occurs) + Tso (master station scan time)
Calculation example 1
When all stations have been added to a 16-unit link, the largest station number is 16, relays and
registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLCs is 1 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (4 + 8) x 4 = 71 bytes Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 71 ≒ 6.82 ms
Each Ts = 1 + 6.82 = 7.82 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 16) = 4.32 ms
Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be:
T max. = 7.82 x 16 + 4.32 + 1 = 130.44 ms
Calculation example 2
When all stations have been added to a 16-unit link, the largest station number is 16, relays and
registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (4 + 8) x 4 = 71 bytes Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 71 ≒ 6.82 ms
Each Ts = 5 + 6.82 = 11.82 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 16) = 4.32 ms
Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be:
T max. = 11.82 x 16 + 4.32 + 5 = 198.44 ms
7-75
Calculation example 3
When all but one station have been added to a 16-unit link, the largest station number is 16,
relays and registers have been allocated evenly, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Ts = 5 + 6.82 = 11.82 ms
Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 15) ≒ 4.13 ms
Tlk = 0.96 + 400 + 0.67 + 5 ≒407 ms
Note: The default value for the addition waiting time is 400 ms.
Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be:
T max. = 11.82 x 15 + 4.13 + 5 + 407 = 593.43 ms
Calculation example 4
When all stations have been added to an 8-unit link, the largest station number is 8, relays and
register have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (8 + 16) x 4 = 119 bytes
Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 119 ≒ 11.43 ms
Each Ts = 5 + 11.43 = 16.43 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 8) ≒ 2.79 ms
Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be:
T max. = 16.43 x 8 + 2.79 + 5 = 139.23 ms
Calculation example 5
When all stations have been added to a 2-unit link, the largest station number is 2, relays and
registers have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (32 + 64) x 4 = 407 bytes
Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 407 ≒ 39.072 ms
Each Ts = 5 + 39.072 = 44.072 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 2) ≒ 1.632 ms
Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be:
T max. = 44.072 x 2 + 1.632 + 5 = 94.776 ms
Calculation example 6
When all stations have been added to a 2-unit link, the largest station number is 2, 32 relays and
2 register words have been evenly allocated, and the scan time for each PLC is 1 ms.
Ttx = 0.096 Each Pcm = 23 + (1 + 1) x 4 = 31 bytes
Tpc = Ttx x Pcm = 0.096 x 31 ≒ 2.976 ms
Each Ts = 1 + 2.976 = 3.976 ms Tlt = 0.096 x (13 + 2 x 2) ≒ 1.632 ms
Given the above conditions, the maximum value for the transmission time (T) of one cycle will be:
T max. = 3.976 x 2 + 1.632 + 1 = 10.584 ms
Note:
• In the description, “stations that have been added” refers to stations which are connected between
station no. 1 and the largest station number and for which the power supply has been turned on.
• Comparing examples 2 and 3, the transmission cycle time is longer if there is one station that has not
been added to the link. As a result the PC(PLC) link response time is longer.
• The SYS1 instruction can be used to minimize thte transmission cycle time even if there are one or
more stations that have not been added to the link.
7-76
Reducing the transmission cycle time when there are stations that have not been added
If there are stations that have not been added to the link, the Tlk time (link addition processing time) and
with this the transmission cycle time will be longer.
With the SYS1 instruction, the link addition waiting time Twt in the above formula can be reduced. Thus,
SYS1 can be used to minimize the increase in the transmission cycle time.
Note:
If there are any unitss that have not been added to the link, the setting should not be changed as
long as a longer link transmission cycle time does not cause any problem.
• The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program, at the rise of R9014. The
same waiting time should be set for all linked PLCs.
• The waiting time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum scan time for any of the PLCs
connected to the link.
• If a short waiting time has been set, there may be PLCs that cannot be added to the link even if their
power supply is on. (The shortest time that can be set is 10 ms.)
7-77
Error detection time for transmission assurance relays
The power supply of any given PLC fails or is turned off, it takes (as a default value) 6.4 seconds for the
transmission assurance relay of the PLC to be turned off at the other stations. This time period can be
shortened using the SYS1 instruction.
Note:
The setting should not be changed as long as a longer transmission assurance relay detection
time does not cause any problems.
• The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program, at the rise of R9014. The
same time should be set for all linked PLCs.
• The time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum transmission cycle time when all of the
PLCs are connected to the link.
• If short time has been set, the transmission assurance relay may not function properly. (The shortest
time that can be set is 100 ms.)
7-78
7.6 Communication Function 4: MODBUS RTU
Communication
Master function
Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 (SEND) and F146 (RECV)
instructions.
Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible.
Slave function
If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit, they send back the response
message corresponding to the content.
Do not execute the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV) instructions when the unti is used as a slave unit.
7-79
MODBUS RTU command message frame
START ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRC CHECK END
3.5-character time 8 bits 8 bits n*8 bits 16 bits 3.5-character time
7-80
Supported commands
Executable
Code Name (MODBUS Remarks
instructions for Name for FP-X
(decimal) original) (Reference No.)
master
F146 (RECV) 01 Read Coil Status Read Y and R Coils 0X
F146 (RECV) 02 Read Input Status Read X Input 1X
F146 (RECV) 03 Read Holding Registers Read DT 4X
F146 (RECV) 04 Read Input Registers Read WL and LD 3X
F145 (SEND) 05 Force Single Coil Write Single Y and R 0X
F145 (SEND) 06 Preset Single Register Write DT 1 Word 4X
Cannot be issued 08 Diagnostics Loopback Test
F145 (SEND) 15 Force Multiple Coils Write Multiple Ys 0X
and Rs
F145 (SEND) 16 Preset Multiple Registers Write DT Multiple 4X
Words
Cannot be issued 22 Mask Write 4X Register Write DT Mask 4X
Cannot be issued 23 Read/Write 4X Registers Read/Write DT 4X
7-81
Dialog box of MODBUS RTU setting
For the details on the MODBUS RTU communication function, refer to the exclusive
specifications manual.
7-82
7.6.2 MEWTOCOL Master (Sample Program)
Use the F145 (SEND) “Data send” or F146 (RECV) “Data receive” instruction to use the MEWTOCOL
master function.
Note: Available for the transistor type and relay type Ver 1.21 or later version only.
Sample program
Note) The above COM1 port will be COM2 port for the COM2 port.
7-84
7.7 Ethernet Communication (AFPX-COM5)
7.7.1 AFPX-COM5
Overview
The communication cassette AFPX-COM5 has an Ethernet interface at the COM1 port and a 3-wire
RS232C interface at the COM2 port.
The Ethernet at the COM1 port supports the computer link and general-purpose serial communication,
and the RS232C at the COM2 port supports the computer link, general-purpose serial communication
and MODBUS RTU.
The use of the COM2 port is the same as other cassettes such as the AFPX-COM2.
Although the Ethernet interface is connected to other device via Ethernet, the AFPX-COM5
communicates with the FP-X via RS232C, and it functions as a converter between Ethernet and RS232C.
Note) Upgrading to Ver1.10 or later version is available from our website (http://www.panasonic-
electric-works.net/ac) free of charge.
Additional functions
- Supports two protocols, which are TCP/IP*1) and UDP/IP*2). Communication with various
devices on a network such as computers can be established.
- Broadcast transmission is available with UDP/IP communication.
- Data can be transmitted to multiple destinations for separate unit numbers (station numbers)
(max. 99 units) (when selecting the computer link).
- IP can be automatically get. (DHCP function)
- The information such as own IP address can be confirmed on the FP-X using the network
information notification and confirmation functions.
7-85
Differences between Ver1.00 and Ver1.10
TCP communication setting
Communication mode select Operation mode select Ver1.00 Ver1.10
Client connection Not available Available
Computer link
Server connection Available Available
General-purpose Client connection Available Available
communication Server connection Available Available
Option setting
Communication mode select Ver1.00 Ver1.10
Response timeout Not available Available
End code Not available Available
Judgment time without termination Not available Available
Network information notification Not available Available
Network information confirmation Not available Available
Connection information confirmation Not available Available
Target IP address for unit number Not available Available
7-86
7.7.4 Communication Tool Software Configurator WD (Ver1.10 or Later)
The communication tool software “Configurator WD” is required to set Ethernet communication for the
AFPX-COM5. Install the Configurator WD before setting the AFPX-COM5.
IP address setting
Item Description Default
Obtain IP
When selecting “Obtain an IP address automatically”, an IP address is Use the
address
obtained from the DHCP server. When selecting “Use the following IP following IP
automatically
Note1) address”, an IP address is set manually. address
Unit name Unit name for Communication cassette AFPX-COM5 can be specified. FPX_ET
IP address of Communication cassette AFPX-COM5
IP address 192.168.1.5
Set an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
Subnet mask Netmask of Communication cassette AFPX-COM5 255.255.255.0
Gateway Gateway of Communication cassette AFPX-COM5 192.168.1.1
Note1) When an error occurs, the ERROR LED will be turned on.
7-87
Communication setting
Item Description Default
Communica-
Communication protocol of AFPX-COM5
tion protocol TCP
Select TCP or UDP.
select
Communicati Communication mode of AFPX-COM5
Computer link
on mode Select Computer link or General communication.
Connection mode of AFPX-COM5
Select Client mode or Server mode.
Action mode Server mode
Common When selecting Computer link for Communication mode, Client
setting mode cannot be selected.
Baud rate for communicating with the COM1 port of FP-X.
Baud rate Change the baud rate according to the baud rate for the COM1
9600 bps
(COM1) port of FP-X.
Select 9600 bps or 115200 bps.
Transmi- Method for transmitting data to partner devices.
ssion Select UNICAST or BROADCAST. UNICAST
method It is valid when selecting UDP in the communication protocol.
Source port Port number that AFPX-COM5 opens.
9094
No. Setting range: 1025 to 32767
Server If AFPX-COM5 not communicate with a destination device
setting during this setting time (seconds) in the state that connection is
Note1)
Time out established, connection will be cut. 0
Setting range: 0 to 1800 s When 0 is set, the connection will
not be cut.
Destination IP address of a destination device
192.168.1.100
IP Set an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
Destination Destination port number of a destination device
9094
port No. Setting range: 1025 to 32767
Source port number of a destination device
Source port
Client Setting range: 0, 1025 to 32767 0
No.
setting When 0 is set, optional.
Note2)
If AFPX-COM5 not communicate with a destination device
during this setting time (seconds) in the state that connection is
Time out established, connection will be cut. 0
Setting range: 0 to 1800 s When 0 is set, the connection will
not be cut.
When failed in the connection with a destination device.
Retry time 15
Setting range: 0 to 1800 s
Note1) Set when the server mode has been selected for the action mode.
Note2) Set when the client mode has been selected for the action mode.
7-88
Option setting
Item Description Default
Response timeout
(When selecting the Set the wait time for the response. 5000 ms
computer link only)
This is the code for the AFPX-COM5 to confirm the end of the
message (data) to be received from the FP-X.
CR, CR+LF or NONE can be selected.
End code CR
Reception continues until the end of the message (CR, CR+LF)
will be received. When selecting NONE, the end code is not
confirmed.
Set the wait time for the end code.
If the received message (data) has no end code and the next
message (data) is not received during the judgment time without
termination (ms), the AFPX-COM5 judges that is no termination,
Judgment time without and performs the following operation.
20 ms
termination (End code: when selecting CR, CR+LF)
The received message (data) is discarded. For TCP, the
connection is disconnected.
(End code: when selecting NONE)
The message (data) is transmitted to the connected destination.
Set the area of DT to be used for the network information and
Information
connection information. 10000
area first No.
Setting range: 3000 to 12000
Network
When the power turns on, the network information will be
information Invalid
Network notified to the FP-X.
notification
informa-
Network
tion When using the computer link and client, the network
information Invalid
information can be confirmed.
conrfirmation
Connection
When using the computer link and server, the connection
information Invalid
information can be confirmed from the LAN side.
confirmation
Destination
unit No. and A command is transmitted to the IP address corresponding to
Traget IP Invalid
IP address is the unit number.
address
specified.
for unit
Select a unit number.
No. Unit No. Invalid
Can be selected from the range of 1 to 99.
IP address Set an IP address. 192.168.1.100
7-89
7.7.5 Communication Mode 1: Computer Link (Ethernet)
The supplement is described below to perform Ethernet communication by the computer link.
Overview
• Communication is conducted between a computer and a PLC using Ethernet by the computer link.
• Remote programming and monitoring is possible via LAN line by using a programming tool such as
FPWIN GR.
Outline of operation
• Establish connection between a computer and the FP-X.
• In that case, the connected computer is called “Client” and the connected FP-X is called “Server”. After
connection establishment, communication via TCP/IP is conducted. Up to 3 connections can be
established at the specified source port.
7-90
Setting of communication environment for Computer link (Ethernet)
The following two settings for the FP-X and communication cassette AFPX-COM5 should be set.
- Communication environment of FP-X
- Communication environment of Communication cassette AFPX-COM5
7-91
Setting Ethernet communication environment of Communication cassette AFPX-COM5
The Configurator WD is used to set Ethernet communication environment of the AFPX-COM5.
Note:
If the TCP is selected for the communication protocol, up to three connections are established using the
computer link (Ethernet), however, when using the programming tool FPWIN GR for connection (using
registration monitor command, multi-frame), more than two connections cannot be established. Also, If
the UDP is selected for the communication protocol, the UDP communication cannot be used as the
programming tool FPWIN GR does not support it, although no restriction on connections.
7-92
7.7.6 Communication (Computer Link (Ethernet))
Overview
A 1:1 computer link connects the FP-X and a computer using a UTP cable (CAT5). Communication is
conducted via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC.
7-93
Setting of Communication cassette AFPX-COM5 (specified using Configurator WD)
IP address setting
Item Default
Get IP address Manual
Unit name FPX_ET
IP address 192.168.1.5
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 192.168.1.1
Communication setting
Item Default
Communication protocol TCP
Action mode Server mode
Baud rate (COM1) 9600 bps
Communication mode Computer link
Source port No. 9094
Time out 0
Note1) Specify the same baud rate as the
communication environment setting of the
COM1 port of the FP-X.
Setting of a computer
IP address setting
Item Default
IP address 192.168.1.100 Note)
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 192.168.1.1
Note) The IP address of a computer is an example.
Set the IP addresses of the computer and
communication cassette AFPX-COM5
according to the network environment to be
used.
7-94
7.7.7 1:N Communication (Computer Link (Ethernet))
Overview
A computer is connected respective PLCs through Ethernet. The computer and the PLC communicate
via commands and responses: The computer sends a command specifying the destination IP address,
and the PLC with that IP address sends a response back to the computer.
It is no problem if the unit number of the PLC overlaps with other PLCs.
7-95
7.7.8 MEWTOCOL Master Communication Setting (Ver 1.10)
For using as the MEWTOCOL master, set the AFPX-COM5 to the compuer link and client. Also,
specifying the simultaneous transmission by broadcast or the targe IP address for unit number in the
option setting enables the communication with various PLCs.
Note:
If you want to transmit data when connection is not established, the connection can be established from
the AFPX-COM5 and data can be transmitted.
In the TCP, it takes some time for connection. The connection timeout for the AFPX-COM5 is the same
as the response timeout value. Set the timeout time for the SEND/RECV instruction longer than the
response timeout value to judge the connection timeout.
7-96
MEWTOCOL master setting in UDP
Item Default
Communication protocol UDP
Action mode Client connection
Baud rate (COM1) 15200 bps/9600 bps
Note1)
Note:
After the AFPX-COM5 is pwered on, it will take about 5 seconds for initializing the Ethernet.
Until the Ehternet is initialized, data cannot be transmitted or received. For the Ethernet communication,
programming is necessary to start the communication after 5 seconds since the power turned on.
Generally, as a router does not transmit a broadcast packet, communication over the router cannot be
achieved. Using the broadcast, processing load is applied on all equipment on the network. Confirm that
the broadcast does not affect other equipment before using it.
7-97
7.7.9 MEWTOCOL Master (Ethernet) (Sample Program) (Ver 1.10 or Later)
Overview
MEWTOCOL communication can be performed with the FP-X using the F145 and F146 instructions. The
following sample program executes 4 MEWTOCOL commands in sequence for 2 slave units using the
F145 and F146 instructions.
Note: It is available for the transistor type and relay type of Ver 1.21 or later.
Description
R100: Stores the data for 10 words from DT1000 of the slave unit 1 into the area from DT100 of the
master unit.
R101: Writes the data for 10 words from DT100 of the master unit to the area form DT1010 of the slave
unit 1.
R102: Stores the data for 10 words from DT1000 of the slave unit 2 into the area from DT120 of the
master unit.
R103: Writes the data for 10 words from DT130 of the master unit to the area form DT1010 of the slave
unit 2.
Set the system registers for each units by a tool software (such as FPWIN GR).
System register setting
Master unit No. 412: Compuer link mode
No. 415: 115200 bps
No. 413: 8 bits, Odd, 1 bit
Slave unit 1 No. 410: Unit No. 1
No. 412: Computer link mode
No. 415: 115200 bps
No. 143 8 bits, Odd, 1 bit
Slave unit 2 No. 410: Unit No. 2
No. 412: Computer link mode
No. 415: 115200 bps
No. 413: 8 bits, Odd, 1 bit
7-98
1. When using the MEWTOCOL master function in TCP
Set as follows for each unit using Configurator WD.
IP address setting Communication setting Option setting
Master unit IP address: 192.168.1.5 Communication protocol: TCP Destination unit No.
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Action mode: Client connection and IP address is
Gateway: 192.168.1.1 Baud rate: 115200 bps specified: On
Communication mode:
Computer link Target IP address
Destination IP address: for unit No.:
192.168.1.11 No.1: 192.168.1.11
Destination port No.: 9094 No.2: 192.168.1.12
Source port No.: 0
Timeout: 0
Retry time: 15
Slave unit 1 IP address: 192.168.1.11 Communication protocol: TCP Not necessary.
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Action mode: Server connection
Gateway: 192.168.1.1 Baud rate: 115200 bps
Communication mode:
Computer link
Source port No.: 9094
Timeout: 0
Slave unit 2 IP address: 192.168.1.2 Communication protocol: TCP Not necessary.
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Action mode: Server connection
Gateway: 192.168.1.1 Baud rate: 115200 bps
Communication mode:
Computer link
Source port No.: 9094
Timeout: 0
7-99
3. When using the MEWTOCOL master function in UDP, BROADCAST communication
Set as follows for each unit using Configurator WD.
IP address setting Communication setting Option setting
Master unit IP address: 192.168.1.5 Communication protocol: UDP Not necessary.
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Action mode: Client connection
Gateway: 192.168.1.1 Baud rate: 115200 bps
Communication mode:
Computer link
Send type: BROADCAST
Destination IP address:
192.168.1.11
Destination port No.: 9094
Source port No.: 0
Slave unit 1 IP address: 192.168.1.11 Communication protocol: UDP Not necessary.
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Action mode: Server connection
Gateway: 192.168.1.1 Baud rate: 115200 bps
Communication mode:
Computer link
Send type: BROADCAST
Source port No.: 9094
Slave unit 2 IP address: 192.168.1.2 Communication protocol: UDP Not necessary.
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Action mode: Server connection
Gateway: 192.168.1.1 Baud rate: 115200 bps
Communication mode:
Computer link
Send type: BROADCAST
Source port No.: 9094
7-100
Master unit sample program
7-101
7.7.10 Communication Function 2: General-purpose Serial Communication
(Ethernet)
The supplement is described below to conduct Ethernet communication by the general-purpose
serial communciation.
Overview
• Data can be sent and received between the FP-X and an external device using Ethernet.
• Data is read from and written to an external device connected to Ethernet by means of an FP-X
program and the FP-X data registers.
Outline of operation
• Connection with an external device is established using the general-purpose serial communication
(Ethernet). Number of connection is one.
• Select either the client mode or server mode.
• In case of the client mode, connection is established by the AFPX-COM5 for a predetermined IP
address after turning on the power supply of the FP-X.
• There are “Send data” and “Receive data” for the data transfer with an external device.
7-102
Setting for using the general-purpose serial communication (Ethernet)
The following two settings for the FP-X and communication cassette AFPX-COM5 should be set.
- Communication environment of FP-X
- Communication environment of Communication cassette AFPX-COM5
7-103
[When Communication cassette AFPX-COM5 is in the TCP client mode]
Dialog box of communication setting: Setting of AFPX-COM5
Item Setting value
Communication protocol TCP
Action mode Client mode
Baud rate (COM1) 115200 bps/9600 bps Note)
Communication mode General communication
Destination IP No. Destination IP address
Destination port No. 1025 to 32767
Source port No. 0, 1025 to 32767
Time out 0 to 1800 s
Retry time 0 to 1800 s
Note) Specify the same baud rate as the communication
environment setting of the COM1 port of the FP-X.
7-104
[When Communication cassette AFPX-COM5 is in the UDP mode]
Dialog box of communication setting: Setting of AFPX-COM5
Item Setting value
Communication protocol UDP
Baud rate (COM1) 115200 bps/9600 bps Note1)
Communication mode General communication
Send type UNICAST/BROADCAST Note2)
Destination IP No. Destination IP address
Destination port No. 1025 to 32767
Source port No. 0, 1025 to 32767
Note1) Specify the same baud rate as the
communication environment setting of the COM1
port of the FP-X.
Note2) When selecting BROADCAST, the setting of the
destination IP address is not required.
Note:
Initializing Ethernet takes approx. 5 seconds on the AFPX-COM5 after turning on the power supply. Until
it finishes, data cannot be sent or received. For Ethernet communication, programming is necessary to
start communication after a lapse of 5 seconds after the power activation.
7-105
7.7.11 Applied Usage (Ethernet) (Ver 1.10 or Later)
- How to confirm the network information on the FP-X.
The network information (own IP address, destination IP address, destination port No., version)
that has been set for the AFPX-COM5 can be confirmed from the FP-X by the option setting. The
connection information (destination IP address, own IP address, version) of the AFPX-COM5 can
be confirmed from the LAN side.
1. Network information notification: Network information is notified to the FP-X from the AFPX-
COM5. (Network information is written to the data register of FP-X by the AFPX-COM5.)
2. Network information confirmation: Network information on the AFP-COM5 can be confirmed
from the FP-X. (The virtual data register within the AFP-COM5 is read from the FP-X.)
3. Connection information confirmation: Connection information on the AFPX-COM5 can be
confirmed from a destination device from a device on a LAN. (The virtual data register within
the AFPX-COM5 is read from a destination device on a LAN.)
7-106
- Network information notification area
Set the area to be used for the network information notification, network information confirmation and
connection information confirmation.
When DT1000 (default) is set for the network information notification area, the following areas will be
used.
7-107
- Network information notification
If the network information notification setting is enabled, the AFPX-COM5 notifies the network
information to the FP-X on completion of the initialization of Ethernet. (Ehternet is initialized after the
power turns on, and when the unit is restareted after the change in settings.) The information is notified
by the data area write command (“WD”) of 10 words from the information area first number with
MEWTOCOL. (For the memory area, “DT” is fixed. For the unit number, “EE” is fixed.) Using this
notification enables the completion of the initialization of Ethernet to be confirmed in a ladder program
and to start communication.)
When using the general-purpose communication, start the communication after receiving the data area
write command for the network information notification and after the response timeout time.
7-108
[Sample program] (Set DT10000 in the network information notification area.)
7-109
- How to transmit a command message to each unit
Settable conditions
- When selecting the client and computer link
- When selecting the UDP and general-purpose communication
- When selecting the broadcast (IP address takes priority, and a command is transmitted via unicast.)
Setting method
1. Check “Destination unit number and IP address is specified.” in the [Option] dialog box.
2. Check the destination unit number you want to set, and double-click the IP address.
(Unit numbers 1 to 99)
3. Specify the destination IP address that is corresponding to the unit number.
Note) When connecting to the IP corresponding to a unit number via TCP, a new connection should be
established after disconnecting the existing connection.
7-110
7.7.12 Example of Connections (Ethernet) (Ver 1.10 or Later)
- Connection with FP2 ET-LAN unit
Overview
Connection can be established with a maximum of 8 FP-X simultaneously using a FP2 ET-LAN unit, and
transmission is performed by the computer link.
Example of connection
7-111
- Setting of FP-X
1) FP-X System register setting
No. 412: Computer link mode
2) Setting of AFPX-COM5
Item Setting value
Communication protocol TCP
Action mode Server mode
Communication mode Computer link
Source port No. 9094
Time out 0
Note:
For MEWTOCOL master function of the FP2 ET-LAN unit, MEWTOCOL-COM is not available. For
communicating with the FP-X by the computer link, transmit the MEWTOCOL-COM data format using
the transparent communication on the FP2 ET-LAN unit. In this case, an exclusive header is not required
for the ET-LAN unit.
7-112
- Connection with GV series via Ethernet
Overview
Connect the FP-X to the GV series via Ethernet. Transmission is performed by sending a response from
the FP-X to the command issued by the GV. The operation with a programmable display can be
performed only by specifying communication settings for each unit without any program for
communication.
Example of connection
- Setting of GV
Use the GV Programmable Operator Terminal CVWIN to specify the Ethernet setting for the GV.
Select [FP series (Ehternet TCP/IP)] in the dialog box of [Select PLC type] when creating a new file, or
select it from [PLC Type Setting] under [System Setting] in the menu bar
Select [Unit Setting] under [System Setting] in the menu bar, and click the [IP Address Setting] tab to set
the IP address of GV.
7-113
Select [Comm. Parameter] under [System Setting] in the menu bar, and select [FP series (Ehternet
TCP/IP)]. Then, click the [Detail] tab, and select 1:n for the connection to set the local number.
Select [Comm. Parameter] under [System Setting] in the menu bar, and select [Network Table Setting]
→ [Ethernet] to open the screen to edit the network. The network table number corresponds to the unit
number of the FP-X.
Set the IP address and port number corresponding to the unit number of the connected FP-X.
7-114
- Setting of FP-X
1) FP-X System register setting
No. 412: Computer link mode
2) Setting of AFPX-COM5
Item Setting value
Communication protocol TCP
Action mode Server mode
Communication mode Computer link
Source port No. 9094
Time out 0
Note:
For the Ethernet communication with the GV, the computer link is used. The GV is the master and the
FP-X is the slave. It cannot be used if setting the FP-X as the master. Note that the unit numbers for the
GV and FP-X are not duplicated.
7-115
7.7.13 Initialization Procedure
Overview
• The Ethernet communication environment setting of the AFPX-COM5 can be initialized.
Initialization procedure
Note) The Ethernet communication setting (including the IP address) cannot be changed when the
switch at the back of the AFPX-COM5 is on. Always turn it off after initialization.
Communication setting
Item Default
Communication protocol TCP
Action mode Server mode
Baud rate (COM1) 9600 bps
Communication mode Computer link
Source port No. 9094
Time out 0
7-116
Chapter 8
Application Cassette
8.1 Expansion of Application Cassette
Following two methods of expansion are available for the FP-X.
1. Add on the FP-X expansion unit or FP0 expansion unit (expansion FP0 adater) with the
expansion cable.
2. Add on the add-on cassette in the cassette mounting part of the FP-X control unit.
For the FP-X, the add-on cassette (application cassette and communication cassette) can be installed on
the FP-X control unit. The number of the expansion units that can be installed varies depending on the
types of the control unit.
8-2
8.2 Application Cassettes
Name Specifications I/O No. Product No.
CH0 WX10
2-channel
FP-X analog WX20
analog input AFPX-AD2
input cassette CH1 WX11
(non-isolated)
WX21
2- channel
CH0 WX10
FP-X thermocouple input
WX20
thermocouple (isolated) AFPX-TC2
CH1 WX11
cassette (isolated between
WX21
channels)
8-3
FP-X output 6-point From Y100
AFPX-TR6P
cassette transistor output (PNP) From Y200
From X100
4-point DC input
FP-X I/O From Y100
3-point transistor output AFPX-IN4T3
cassette From X200
(NPN)
From Y200
From X100
2-channel high-speed
FP-X pulse I/O From Y100
Note2) counter + 1-channel AFPX-PLS
cassette From X200
pulse output
From Y200
FP-X master
Master memory +
memory − AFPX-MRTC
realtime clock
cassette
Note1) The I/O numbers are the cassette mounting part 1 (from X100 and Y100) and cassette mounting
part 2 (from X200 and Y200).
8-4
8.3 Specifications
Note3) Averaging cannot be processed with the cassette. If averaging is necessary, use a ladder
program to execute averaging process.
Terminal layout
CH0 V Voltage input
I Current input
SEL Voltage/current select
COM Common
CH1 V Voltage input
I Current input
SEL Voltage/current select
COM Common
Note) There is no LED indication. NC Not used
8-5
Connection method
DC input: 0 mA to 20 mA
Conversion characteristics graph
8-6
DC input: 0 V to 10 V
Conversion characteristics graph
Note:
• Use double-core twisted-pair shielded wires. It is recommended to ground them. However, depending
on the conditions of the external noise, it may be better not to ground the shielding.
• Do not have the analog input wiring close to AC wires, power wires, or load.
8-7
8.3.2 FP-X Analog Output Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-DA2
Item Specifications
No. of output points 2 channels/cassette
Voltage 0 to 10 V
Output range
Current 0 to 20 mA
Digital value K0 to K4000 Note1)
Resolution 1/4000 (12 bits)
Conversion speed 1 ms/1 channel
Total accuracy ±1% F.S. or less (0 to 55 °C)
Output impedance 0.5 kΩ (Voltage output)
Output max. current 10 mA (Voltage output)
Output allowable load resistance 600 Ω or less (Current output)
Between analog output terminal and internal digital circuit part
Transformer insulation, Isolation IC insulation
Insulation
Between each channel of analog output terminals
Transformer insulation , Isolation IC insulation
Note1) When the digital value exceeds the upper and lower limits, D/A conversion will not be performed.
Note2) Following time is required to reflect the output of the control unit in the analog output.
Terminal layout
CH0 V Voltage output
I Current output
COM0 Common
CH1 V Voltage output
I Current output
COM1 Common
NC Not used
Connection method
8-8
0 mA to 20 mA output
Conversion characteristics graph
0 V to 10 V output
Conversion characteristics graph
8-9
Table of D/A converted values
Digital input value Output voltage (V)
0 0.0
400 1.0
800 2.0
1200 3.0
1600 4.0
2000 5.0
2400 6.0
2800 7.0
3200 8.0
3600 9.0
4000 10.0
Note:
• Use double-core twisted-pair shielded wires. It is recommended to ground them. However, depending
on the conditions of the external noise, it may be better not to ground the shielding.
• Do not have the analog output wiring close to AC wires, power wires, or load.
8-10
8.3.3 FP-X Analog I/O Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-A21
Item Specifications
No. of input points 2 channels/cassette
Voltage 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V
Input range
Current 0 to 20 mA
Digital conversion value K0 to K4000
Resolution 1/4000 (12 bits)
Conversion speed 1 ms/channel
Total accuracy ±1% F.S. or less (0 to 55 °C)
Voltage 1M Ω
Input impedance
Current 250 Ω
Voltage -0.5, +15 V (Voltage input)
Absolute max. input
Current +30 mA (Current output)
Between analog output terminal and internal digital circuit part
Transformer insulation, Isolation IC insulation
Insulation
Between each channel of analog output terminals
Transformer insulation , Isolation IC insulation
Note1) When the analog input values exceed the upper and lower limits, the digital values maintain the
upper and lower limit values. As the resoluation is 12 bits, the higher 4 bits of the input contact
are always 0.
Note2) Following time is required to reflect the analog data in the input of the control unit.
Note3) Averaging cannot be processed with the cassette. If averaging is necessary, use a ladder
program to execute averaging process.
Item Specifications
No. of output points 1 channels/cassette
Voltage 0 to 10 V
Output range
Current 0 to 20 mA
Digital value K0 to K4000 Note)
Resolution 1/4000 (12 bits)
Conversion speed 1 ms/1 channel
Total accuracy ±1% F.S. or less (0 to 55 °C)
Output impedance 0.5 kΩ (Voltage output)
Output max. current 10 mA (Voltage output)
Output allowable load resistance 600 Ω or less (Current output)
Between analog output terminal and internal digital circuit part
Transformer insulation, Isolation IC insulation
Insulation
Between analog output terminal and analog input terminal
Transformer insulation , Isolation IC insulation
8-11
Terminal layout
V Voltage input
CH0
I Current input
V Voltage input
CH1
Input I Current input
COM Common (for input)
0 to 10 V/0 to 5 V, 0
SEL
to 20 mA selectable
V Voltage output
Output I Current output
COM Common (for output)
Note) The CH0 and CH1 will be the same range according
to switching of the voltage input and current input.
Connection method
8-12
DC input: 0 mA to 20 mA
Conversion characteristics graph
8-13
DC input: 0 V to 10 V
Conversion characteristics graph
8-14
DC input: 0 V to 5 V
Conversion characteristics graph
Note:
• Use double-core twisted-pair shielded wires. It is recommended to ground them. However, depending
on the conditions of the external noise, it may be better not to ground the shielding.
• Do not have the analog input wiring close to AC wires, power wires, or load.
8-15
0 mA to 20 mA output
Conversion characteristics graph
8-16
0 V to 10 V output
Conversion characteristics graph
Note:
• Use double-core twisted-pair shielded wires. It is recommended to ground them. However, depending
on the conditions of the external noise, it may be better not to ground the shielding.
• Do not have the analog output wiring close to AC wires, power wires, or load.
8-17
8.3.4 FP-X Thermocouple Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-TC2
Item Specifications
No. of input points 2 channels/cassette
Thermocouple type K (-50.0 to 500.0 °C)
Input range
Thermocouple type J (-50.0 to 500.0 °C)
In normal condition: K-500 to K5000
When exceeding rated range: K-501, K5001 or K8000
Digital value
When wire is broken: K8000
When data is getteing ready: K8001
Resolution 0.2 °C (The indication is 0.1 °C by the software averaging procedure.)
Sampling cycle 200 ms/ 2 channels
Total accuracy 0.5% F.S. or less + Cold junction error 1.5 °C
Input impedance 344 kΩ
Insulation Transformer insulation, isolation IC insulation
Note1) When the wire of thermocouple is broken, the digital value will change to K8000 within 70
seconds. Practice in the ladder program a process for avoiding a risk, would be resulting from a
broken wire, and exchange the thermocouple.
Note2) From the Power-on to the converted data Ready, the digital value will be K8001. Create a ladder
program not to use the data obtained during that period.
Terminal layout
CH0 + Thermocouple input +
- Thermocouple input -
CH1 + Thermocouple input +
- Thermocouple input -
NC Used by the system.
Do not connect
anything.
Connection method
Keep the spece more than 100 mm between the input line and the power line/high-voltage line.
It is recommended to ground the unit using the shielded compensating wire.
8-18
Range setting switch
Select the thermocouple type K or J with the switch at the back. (The CH0 and CH1 will be the same
range.)
Switch (backside)
Thermocouple type K
Thermocouple type J
K and J range
Conversion characteristics graph
8-19
8.3.5 FP-X Input Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-IN8
Item Description
Insulation method Optical coupler
Rated input voltage 24 V DC
Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Rated input current Approx. 3.5 mA
8 points/common
Input points per common (Either the positive or negative of input power supply can be
connected to common terminal.)
Min. on voltage/Min. on current 19.2 V DC/3 mA
Max. off voltage/Max. off current 2.4 V DC/1 mA
Input impedance Approx. 6.8 kΩ
off→on 1.0 ms or less
Response time
on→off 1.0 ms or less
Operating mode indicator LED display
EN61131-2 Applicable type TYPE3 (however, according to the above specifications)
Circuit diagram
8-20
8.3.6 FP-X Output Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-TR8
Item Description
Insulation method Optical coupler
Output type Open collector (NPN)
Rated load voltage 24 V DC
Operating load voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Max. load current 0.3 A
Max. surge current 1.5 A
Output points per common 8 points/common
Off state leakage current 1μ A or less
On state voltage drop 1.5 V DC or less
off→on 0.1 ms or less
Response time
on→off 0.8 ms or less
Surge absorber Zener diode
Operating mode indicator LED display
Circuit diagram
8-21
Product No.: AFPX-TR6P
Item Description
Insulation method Optical coupler
Output type Open collector (PNP)
Rated load voltage 24 V DC
Operating load voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Max. load current 0.5 A
Max. surge current 1.5 A
Output points per common 6 points/common
Off state leakage current 1μ A or less
On state voltage drop 1.5 V DC or less
off→on 0.1 ms or less
Response time
on→off 0.8 ms or less
Surge absorber Zener diode
Operating mode indicator LED display
Circuit diagram
8-22
8.3.7 FP-X I/O Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-IN4T3
Input specifications
Item Description
Rated input voltage 24 V DC
Operating voltage range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Rated input current Approx. 3.5 mA
Input points per common 4 points/common
Min. on voltage/Min. on current 19.2 V DC/3 mA
Max. off voltage/Max. off current 2.4 V DC/1 mA
Input impedance Approx. 6.8 kΩ
Response time 1 ms or less
Operating mode indicator LED display
Output specifications
Item Description
Output type Open collector (NPN)
Rated load voltage 24 V DC
Max. load current 0.3 A
Output points per common 3 points/common
off→on 0.1 ms or less
Response time
on→off 0.8 ms or less
Operating mode indicator LED display
Circuit diagram
8-23
8.3.8 FP-X Pulse I/O Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-PLS
Note:
The pulse I/O cassette cannot be used with the FP-X Control Unit Tr type.
8-24
LED indication/Terminal layout
Circuit diagram
High-speed counter part Pulse output part
8-25
8.3.9 FP-X Master Memory Cassette
Product No.: AFPX-MRTC
Item Specifications
Year, month, day hour (24-hour display), minute, second and
Setting items
day of week
Realtime clock At 0 °C: less than 104 seconds per month
Accuracy At 25 °C: less than 51 seconds per month
At 55 °C: less than 155 seconds per month
Memory capacity Flash ROM (512 kB)
System registers
Master memory Ladder programs
function Storable data Comment data (328 kB)
F-ROM data area
Security function
Note: Only the realtime clock function is valid at the factory setting. Install a battery in the control
unit to use the realtime clock function.
If the battery is not installed, the realtime clock does not function.
Reference: For the information on the installation of the battery,
<5.9 Installtion and Setting of Backup Battery>
Function changeover switch (between the realtime clock and the master memory)
Use the switch at the back of the cassette to switch between the realtime clock and master memory
functions.
Reference: For the information on the realtime clock and master memory functions,
<12.2 Functions of Master Memory Cassette>
8-26
Chapter 9
High-speed Counter, Pulse Output and
PWM Output Functions
(For Tr Type)
9.1 Overview of Each Functions
Describes the functions of the transistor type (Tr type) FP-X control unit.
9-2
PWM output function (Control unit)
By using the exclusive instruction, the PWM
output function enables a pulse output of the
desired duty ratio.
Note) The pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) cannot be used with the FP-X Tr type control unit.
Counting range
• K-2, 147, 483, 648 to K+2, 147, 483, 647 (Coded 32-bit binary)
• The built-in high-speed counter is a ring counter. Consequently, if the counted value exceeds the
maximum value, it returns to the minimum value. Similarly, if the counted value drops below the
minimum value, it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there.
Note:
When the linear interpolation instruction F175 is used, the value for the amount of travel should be set so
that it is within the range indicated below.
-8,388,608 to +8,388,607 (Coded 24-bit binary)
9-3
9.2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items
9.2.1 Specifications
High-speed counter function
High-speed counter by the input of the main unit
Performance
Memory area being used
specifications
Input Reset Min. Max.
Channel No. Elapsed Target
contact input Control input counting
value value
flag pulse speed
area area Note1)
width
DT90300 DT90302 1 CH:
CH0 X0 X6 R9110
DT90301 DT90303 100 kHz
DT90304 DT90306 High- 2 CH:
CH1 X1 None R9111
High- DT90305 DT90307 speed 80 kHz
speed DT90308 DT90310 input 3 CH:
5 μs
CH2 X2 X7 R9112 60 kHz
DT90309 DT90311
4 CH:
DT90312 DT90314
[Single phase] CH3 X3 None R9113 50 kHz
DT90313 DT90315
Incremental,
Decremental DT90316 DT90318
CH4 X4 None R9114
DT90317 DT90319
DT90320 DT90322 Medium-
CH5 X5 None R9115
Medium- DT90321 DT90323 speed 10 kHz
speed DT90324 DT90326 input each
100 μs
CH6 X6 None R9116
DT90325 DT90327
DT90328 DT90330
CH7 X7 None R9117
DT90329 DT90331
X0 DT90300 DT90302 High- 1 CH:
CH0 X6 R9110
High- X1 DT90301 DT90303 speed 35 kHz
[2-phase] speed input 2 CH:
X2 DT90308 DT90310
2-phase input , CH2
X3
X7 R9112
DT90309 DT90311 14.3 μs 25 kHz
One input,
Direction X4 DT90316 DT90318 Medium-
CH4 None R9114
distinction Medium- X5 DT90317 DT90319 speed 5 kHz
speed X6 DT90324 DT90326 input each
CH6 None R9116 100 μs
X7 DT90325 DT90327
Related instructions:
F0(MV) :High-speed counter control
F1(DMV) :Read/write of elapsed value of high-speed counter
F166(HC1S) :Target value match on
F167(CH1R) :Target value match off
Note1) These values are available only when the conditions of each item (such as counting method or
No. of channels) are executed.
These values are not available if executing the HSC match ON/OFF instruction, other pulse I/O
process simultaneously or executing the interrupt program.
9-4
Pulse output function
Pulse output when using CPU output
Input/output contact number used Memory area used
Devi-
CW CW Max.
ation
or or Near Con- Elapsed Target output
Channel No. coun- Home
pulse Sign home trol value value frequency
ter input Note2)
out- out- input flag area area
clear
put put
output
Y4 or DT90348 DT90350 1CH:
CH0 Y0 Y1 Note1) X4 R911C
High- Y8 DT90349 DT90351 100kHz
speed Y5 or DT90352 DT90354 2CH:
CH1 Y2 Y3 Note1) X5 R911D
Indepen- Y9 DT90353 DT90355 100kHz
dence DT90356 DT90358 1CH:
CH2 Y4 Y5 None X6 R911E
Medium- DT90357 DT90359 20kHz
speed DT90360 DT90362 2CH:
CH3 Y6 Y7 None X7 R911F
DT90052 DT90361 DT90363 20kHz
Y4 or <bit4> DT90348 DT90350
High- X axis Y0 Y1 Note1) X4 R911C Composite
Y8 DT90349 DT90351
speed speed
Y5 or DT90352 DT90354
CH0 Y axis Y2 Y3 Note1) X5 R911D 100kHz
Linear Y9 DT90353 DT90355
interpolation DT90356 DT90358
Medium- X axis Y4 Y5 None X6 R911E Composite
DT90357 DT90359
speed speed
DT90360 DT90362
CH2 Y axis Y6 Y7 None X7 R911F 20kHz
DT90361 DT90363
Related instructions
F0 (MV) :high-speed counter control
F1 (DMV) :Read/write of elapsed value of high-speed counter
F171 (SPDH) :trapezoidal control/home return
F172 (PLSH) :JOG operation
F174 (SP0H) :Data table control
F175 (SPSH) :Linear interpolation control
Note1) For C14, Y4 or Y5. For C30/C60, Y8 or Y9.
Note2) These values are available only when the conditions of each item (such as output method or No.
of channels) are executed.
These values are not available if executing the HSC match ON/OFF instruction, other pulse I/O
process simultaneously or executing the interrupt program.
9-6
Max. counting speed
(Frequency kHz)
Combination with pulse output function
Pulse output 2 CH Pulse output 4 CH
Pulse output 1 CH Pulse output 3 CH
(1-axis interpolation) (2-axis interpolation)
Single- Single- 2- Single- Single- 2- Single- Single- 2- Single- Single- 2-
2-phase 2-phase 2-phase 2-phase
phase phase phase phase phase phase phase phase phase phase phase phase
medium- medium- medium- medium-
high- medium- high- high- medium- high- high- medium- high- high- medium- high-
speed speed speed speed
speed speed speed speed speed speed speed speed speed speed speed speed
65 45 40 35
55 40 35 30
45 35 30 25
40 30 25 25
10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10
65 10 45 10 45 10 35 10
65 10 45 10 45 10 35 10
65 10 45 10 45 10 35 10
65 10 45 10 45 10 35 10
55 10 40 10 35 10 30 10
55 10 40 10 35 10 30 10
55 10 40 10 35 10 30 10
55 10 40 10 35 10 30 10
45 10 35 10 30 10 25 10
45 10 35 10 30 10 25 10
45 10 35 10 30 10 25 10
45 10 35 10 30 10 25 10
40 10 30 10 25 10 25 10
40 10 30 10 25 10 25 10
40 10 30 10 25 10 25 10
40 10 30 10 25 10 25 10
25 20 15 15
20 15 15 14
5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5
25 5 20 5 15 5 15 5
25 5 20 5 15 5 15 5
15 5 15 5 15 5 10 5
15 5 15 5 15 5 10 5
10 25 10 20 10 15 10 15
10 20 10 15 10 15 10 14
65 5 45 5 40 5 35 5
55 5 40 5 35 5 30 5
45 5 35 5 30 5 25 5
40 5 30 5 25 5 25 5
65 5 45 5 40 5 35 5
55 5 40 5 35 5 29 5
45 5 35 5 30 5 25 5
40 5 30 5 25 5 25 5
Note) The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above-mentioned values when the HSC
target value match ON/OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are executed
simultaneously.
9-7
Pulse input/output performance
Independent control
High-speed Medium-speed Maximum output frequency kHz
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 High-speed CH Medium-speed CH
Available 100
Available Available 100
Available Available Available 100 20
Available Available Available Available 100 20
Note) Even if all channels are used, they can be used within the ranges above.
Interpolation control
Maximum output frequency kHz
High-speed Medium-speed
(Composite speed)
CH0 CH2 High-speed CH Medium-speed CH
Available 100
Available Available 100 20
Note) Even if all channels are used for the interpolation function, they can be used within the ranges
above.
9-8
Restrictions on I/O allocations
• Various functions listed in the table of specifications cannot be allocated to one I/O at the same time.
Allocations of input X and restrictions when using the high-speed counter function
When using the high-speed counter, it is necessary to set how to use the input by system registers.
C14/C30/C60 Tr type
Pulse High-speed Medium-speed
Signal CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7
Single-phase input X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7
2-phase input X0, X1 - X2, X3 - X4, X5 - X6, X7 -
Reset input X6 - X7 - - - - -
Note) The X4, X5, X6 and X7 are also used for the home input of the pulse output. Use them only for
either one signal.
Allocations of output Y and restrictions when using the pulse output function
When using the pulse output function, it is necessary to set how to use the input/output by system
registers.
C14 Tr type
Pulse High-speed Medium-speed
Signal CH0 CH1 CH2
CW PULSE Y0 Y2 Y4
CCW SIGN Y1 Y3 Y5
Deviaton counter clear output Y4 Y5 -
Home input X4 X5 X6
Note) The Y4 and Y5 of the medium-speed pulse are also used for the deviation counter clear signal.
The X4, X5 and X6 of the home input are also used for the input of the high-speed counter.
Use them only for either one signal.
Note:
• With the C14, if the home return is executed with the deviation counter clear for the pulse output CH0,
set the Y4 to the normal output by the system register.
• With the C14, if the home return is executed with the deviation counter clear for the pulse output CH1,
set the Y5 to the normal output by the system register.
• If the home return is executed, set the home input by the system register 401.
If the home return is executed without the setting, an operation error occurs.
C30/C60 Tr type
Pulse High-speed Medium-speed
Signal CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3
CW PULSE Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6
CCW SIGN Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7
Deviaton counter clear output Y8 Y9 - -
Home input X4 X5 X6 X7
Note) The X4, X5, X6 and X7 of the home input are also used for the input of the high-speed counter.
Use them only for either one signal.
Note:
• If the home return is executed, set the home input by the system register 401.
If the home return is executed without the setting, an operation error occurs.
9-10
9.3 High-speed Counter Function
Direction discrimination
9-11
Count for reset input
(Incremental input mode)
9-12
9.3.4 I/O Allocation
• As shown in the table of specifications, the inputs and outputs used will differ depending on the
channel number being used.
• The output turned on and off can be specified with instructions F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) for
desired output (Yn:n<300).
When using CH0 of the high-speed counter When using CH0 of the high-speed counter
with incremental input and reset input with two-phase input and reset input
* The output turned on and off when the target * The output turned on and off when the target
value is reached can be specified as arbitrary value is reached can be specified as arbitrary
output of the main unit or add-on cassette. output of the main unit or add-on cassette.
In the above program, the reset is performed in step (1) and 0 is entered just after that in step (2). The
count is now ready for operation. If it is only reset, counting will not be performed.
9-13
High-speed counter/pulse output control flag area of FP-X Tr type
Note)
• In the reset input setting, the reset input
(X6 or X7) for CH0 or CH2 allocated in the
high-speed counter setting of the system
registers are defined to “enable/disable”.
• The high-speed counter to be used with
the reset input is CH0 and CH2 only.
9-14
Target value match ON instruction (F166)
Example 1:
If the elapsed value (DT90300 and DT90301)
for channel 0 matches K10000, output Y7 turns
on.
Example 2:
If the elapsed value (DT90308 and DT90309)
for channel 2 matches K20000, output Y6 turns
on.
Example 2:
If the elapsed value (DT90312 and DT90313)
for channel 3 matches K40000, output Y5 turns
off.
FP-X Tr type – Elapsed value and target value areas of high-speed counter ch0 to ch7
High-speed counter
Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area
Channel No.
ch0 R9110 DT90300 to DT90301 DT90302 to DT90303
ch1 R9111 DT90304 to DT90305 DT90304 to DT90307
ch2 R9112 DT90308 to DT90309 DT90310 to DT90311
ch3 R9113 DT90312 to DT90313 DT90314 to DT90315
ch4 R9114 DT90316 to DT90317 DT90318 to DT90319
ch5 R9115 DT90320 to DT90321 DT90322 to DT90323
ch6 R9116 DT90324 to DT90325 DT90326 to DT90327
ch7 R9117 DT90328 to DT90329 DT90330 to DT90331
9-15
9.3.6 Sample program (Control Unit and Main Unit I/O)
Positioning operations with a single speed inverter
Wiring example
Program
When X5 is turned on, Y0 turns on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value (DT90300
and DT90301) reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.
9-16
Positioning operations with a double speed inverter
Wiring example
9-17
Program
When X5 is turned on, Y0 and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value
(DT90300 and DT90301) reaches K4500, Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating. When the
elapsed value reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.
9-18
9.4 Pulse Output Function
Note:
• With the Tr type, the CPU output is used to perform the pulse output funciton.
The pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) cannot be used.
9-19
9.4.2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes
Clockwise/counter-clockwise output method
Control is carried out using two
pulses: a forward rotation pulse and a
reverse rotation pulse.
Note:
The output signals are the number of the built-in output of the main unit.
When the pulse output has been set, only the pulse is output, and the values of the output memories Y0,
Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4 and Y5 are not output. So, they will not be turned on/off even if monitoring with the tool.
9-20
Operation mode
Incremental <Relative value control>
Outputs the pulses set with the target value.
Selected
Pulse and direction Pulse and direction
Mode HSC counting
CW/CCW forward OFF/ forward ON/
Target Method
reverse ON reverse OFF
value
Pulse output when Pulse output when
Pulse output
Positive direction output is direction output is Incremental
from CW
OFF ON
Pulse output when Pulse output when
Pulse output
Negative direction output is direction output is Decremental
from CCW
ON OFF
Example:
When the current position (value of elapsed value area) is 5000, the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by
executing the pulse output instruction with the target value +1000, and the current position will be 6000.
Home return
• When executing the F171 (SPDH) instruction, the pulse is continuously output until the home input (X4,
X5, X6 or X7) is enabled (for the C14 Tr type, X4, X5 or X6).
• To decelerate the movement when near the home position, designate a near home input and set bit 4
of special data register DT90052 to off → on → off.
• The deviation counter clear output can be output when home return has been completed. (However,
the deviation counter clear output is available only for CH0 and CH1.)
JOG operation
• Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for F172 (PLSH) instruction is in the ON
state. Also, the pulse output can be stopped when the specified target value is matched.
• The direction output and output frequency are specified by F172 (PLSH) instruction.
9-21
Precautions on programming
Address Flag conditions The uses of the flag in the program
Use this to prohibit the simultaneous
Turns on during execution of pulse output
R911C execution of other high-speed counter
instructions and then maintains that state
Control flag instructions and pulse output
during pulse output from CH0. This flag is
(CH0) instructions, and to verify completion
the same for instructions F166 to F175.
of an action.
Use this to prohibit the simultaneous
Turns on during execution of pulse output
R911D execution of other high-speed counter
instructions and then maintains that state
Control flag instructions and pulse output
during pulse output from CH0. This flag is
(CH1) instructions, and to verify completion
the same for instructions F166 to F175.
of an action.
Use this to prohibit the simultaneous
Turns on during execution of pulse output
R911E execution of other high-speed counter
instructions and then maintains that state
Control flag instructions and pulse output
during pulse output from CH2. This flag is
(CH2) instructions, and to verify completion
the same for instructions F166 to F175.
of an action.
Use this to prohibit the simultaneous
Turns on during execution of pulse output
R911F execution of other high-speed counter
instructions and then maintains that state
Control flag instructions and pulse output
during pulse output from CH3. This flag is
(CH3) instructions, and to verify completion
the same for instructions F166 to F175.
of an action.
Note:
• The above flags vary during scanning.
Example: If the above flags are used for more than one time as input conditions, there may be the
different states in the same scan. Replace with internal relays at the beginning of the program as a
measure.
9-22
9.4.3 I/O Allocation
Double pulse input driver
(CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method)
• Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for “CW, CCW”.
• The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used.
• Set the control code for F171 (SPDH) instruction to “CW/CCW”.
<When using CH0> <When using CH1>
* Input that is not used for other applications is * Input that is not used for other applications is
specified for the near home input. specified for the near home input.
Note) If the deviation counter clear output Note) If the deviation counter clear output
function is performed when the home function is performed when the home
return is done, Y4 is used for the C14 Tr return is done, Y5 is used for the C14 Tr
type, and Y8 is used for the C30/C60 Tr type, and Y9 is used for the C30/C60 Tr
type. type.
<When using CH2> <When using CH3> (C30, C60 Tr type only)
* Input that is not used for other applications is * Input that is not used for other applications is
specified for the near home input. specified for the near home input.
Note) The deviaion counter clear output function is not available for the CH2 and CH3.
9-23
Single pulse input driver
(pulse input and directional switching input method)
• One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output.
• The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal, direction output terminal, and home input is determined by
the channel used.
• Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the <bit4> of
special data register DT90052.
* Input that is not used for other applications is * Input that is not used for other applications is
specified for the near home input. specified for the near home input.
Note) If the deviation counter clear output Note) If the deviation counter clear output
function is performed when the home function is performed when the home
return is done, Y4 is used for the C14 Tr return is done, Y5 is used for the C14 Tr
type, and Y8 is used for the C30/C60 Tr type, and Y9 is used for the C30/C60 Tr
type. type.
<When using CH2> <When using CH3> (C30, C60 Tr type only)
* Input that is not used for other applications is * Input that is not used for other applications is
specified for the near home input. specified for the near home input.
Note) The deviaion counter clear output function is not available for the CH2 and CH3.
9-24
9.4.4 Pulse output control instructions (F0) (F1)
Pulse output control instruction (F0)
• This instruction is used for resetting the built-in high-speed counter, stopping the pulse output, and
setting and resetting the near home input.
• Specify this F0 (MV) instruction together with special data register DT90052.
• Once this instruction is executed, the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again.
Example 1:
Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration.
In case of CH0
Example 2:
Performing a forced stop of the pulse output.
In case of CH0
9-25
Key Point: High-speed counter/pulse output control flag area of FP-X Tr type
• The area DT90052 for writing channels and
control codes is allocated as shown in the left
figure.
• Control codes written with an F0 (MV)
instruction are stored by channel in special
data register DT90380 to DT90383.
Note) The output counting value of the elapsed
value area may be different from the
input counting value of the motor side if
the pulse output is stopped by the
“Continue/stop of pulse output”. After the
pulse output stops, execute the home
return.
Reference: <9.2.1 Table of specifications> for information on the special data register.
Example 1:
Writing the elapsed value
Set the initial value of K3000 in the pulse output
CH0.
FP-X Tr type - Elapsed value and target value areas of pulse output ch0 to ch3
Pulse output
Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area
Channel No.
ch0 R911C DT90348 to DT90349 DT90350 to DT90351
ch1 R911D DT90352 to DT90353 DT90354 to DT90355
ch2 R911E DT90356 to DT90357 DT90358 to DT90359
ch3 R911F DT90360 to DT90361 DT90362 to DT90363
9-26
9.4.5 Wiring for Pulse Output Sample Program (F171 to F174)
Wiring example
Note) When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type, connect a 2 kΩ (1/2 W) resistor with
the R1 and a 2 kΩ (1/2 W) to 470 Ω (2 W) resistor with the R2.
9-27
9.4.6 Positioning Control Instruction F171 - Trapezoidal
• This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table.
9-28
9-29
Sample program
Incremental Position Control Operation: Plus Direction
When X0 turns on, the pulse is output from CW output Y0 of the specified channel CH0.
Note) In that case, the memory Y0 does not turn on/off according to the pulse output, and also the
monitoring is not possible.
Program
9-30
Incremental Position Control Operation: Minus Direction
When X1 turns on, the pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CH0.
Note) In that case, the memory Y1 does not turn on/off according to the pulse output.
Program
9-31
Absolute position control operation
When X1 is turned on, pulses are output from CW output Y0 or CCW output Y1 of the specified channel
CH0. If the current value at that point is larger than 22000, the pulses are output from Y1, and if the
value is smaller than 22000, the pulses are output from Y0.
Note) In that case, the memory Y0 or Y1 does not turn on/off according to the pulse output, and also the
monitoring is not possible.
Program
9-32
9.4.7 Positioning Control Instruction F171 – Home Return (Common to
Transistor type)
• This function performs home return according to the specified data table. The elapsed value area CH0
(DT90348, DT90349) and CH1 (DT90352, DT90353) is cleared to zero after the completion of home
return.
Note) If the home return is executed, set the home input by the system register 401.
If the home return is executed without the setting, an operation error occurs.
9-33
9-34
Home return operation modes
There are two operation modes for a home return with the FP-X: Type I and Type II.
Reference:
The Pulse output control instruction (F0) is used for the near home input.
<9.4.4 Pulse output control instructions (F0) (F1)>.
9-35
Sample program
Home return operation using CH0: Minus direction
When X2 turns on, a pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CH0 and the return to
home begins. When X5 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X4 turns on, home return is completed.
After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT90349 are cleared to 0.
Program
9-36
Sample program
Home return operation using CH1: Plus direction
When X3 turns on, a pulse is output from CW output Y2 of the specified channel CH1 and the return to
home begins. When X6 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X5 turns on, home return is completed.
After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90352 and DT90353 are cleared to 0.
Program
9-37
9.4.8 Pulse Output Instruction F172 – JOG operation
• This instruction is used for JOG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when the
execution condition (trigger) turns on.
9-38
Key Point:
The FP-X supports two operation modes for JOG operation, one in which no target value is specified,
and one in which feed stops when the target value is reached.
9-39
Sample program
JOG operation : Plus direction
While X6 is in the ON state, a pulse is output from the CW output Y0 of the specified channel CH0.
Program
9-40
JOG operation : Minus direction
While X7 is in the ON state, a pulse is output from the CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CH0.
Program
Reference:
The pulse output control instruction (F0) is used for the pulse output stop.
<9.4.4 Pulse output control instruction (F0) (F1)>
9-41
9.4.9 Positioning Control Instruction F174 – Data Table Control
• Positioning is performed according to the specified data table.
9-42
9-43
9.4.10 Pulse Output Instruction F175 – Linear Interpolation
• The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table.
Note:
The linear interpolation function can be used in the combination of (ch0 and ch1) or (ch2 and ch3).
9-44
9-45
Sample program of interpolation control
Wiring example
Note) When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type, connect a 2 kΩ (1/2 W) resistor with
the R1 and a 2 kΩ (1/2 W) to 470 Ω (2 W) resistor with the R2.
9-46
Restrictions on positioning data setting
• Designate settings for the target position and moving amount so they are within the following range.
Allowable range: -8,388,608 to +8,388,608
• When using in combination with other positioning instructions like F171, designate so the target value
is within the above range, even in those instructions.
Sample program
Continuous interpolation control
• Using the linear interpolation function, perform positioning control that draws trajectory like the one
shown below.
Relay allocation
Relay No. Description Relay No. Description
X1 Positioning start R9010 Always ON
X2 Emergency stop switch R911C Pulse output flag (CH0)
R20 From P1 to P2 start R911D Pulse output flag (CH1)
R21 From P2 to P3 start
R22 From P3 to P4 start
R23 From P4 to P1 start
R2F Positioning done
9-47
Program
9-48
Home return operation (Minus direction)
When X0 turns on, the pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CH0 and CCW
output Y3 of the specified channel CH1, and the return to home begins.
In CH0, when X6 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X4 turns on, home return is completed. After
the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT90349 are cleared to 0.
In CH1, when X7 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X5 turns on, home return is completed. After
the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90352 and DT90353 are cleared to 0.
When the operations in both CHs is completed, the return to home completes.
9-49
Program
Key Point:
As there is not interpolation function for the home return, the home return should be executed for each
channel. After the home return for both channels is completed, the positioning operation running
program (R40) turns off.
9-50
9.5 PWM Output Function (Pulse I/O Cassette)
Note:
The pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) cannot be used with the FP-X Tr type.
Data table
DT100 Control code *1 : K1
DT101 Duty *2 : 50%
*1: Specify the control code by setting the K constant.
Resolution of 1000 Resolution of 100
K Frequency (Hz) Period (ms) K Frequency (Hz) Period (ms)
K0 1.5 666.67 K20 15.6 k 0.06
K1 2.0 502.51 K21 20.8 k 0.05
K2 4.1 245.70 K22 25.0 k 0.04
K3 6.1 163.93 K23 31.3 k 0.03
K4 8.1 122.85 K24 41.7 k 0.02
K5 9.8 102.35
K6 19.5 51.20 However, for the medium-speed channel
K7 48.8 20.48 CH2 and CH3 of the Tr type, it is not possible
K8 97.7 10.24 to specify from K21 to k24.
K9 201.6 4.96
K10 403.2 2.48
K11 500.0 2.00
K12 694.4 1.44
K13 1.0 k 0.96
K14 1.3 k 0.80
K15 1.6 k 0.64
K16 2.1 k 0.48
K17 3.1 k 0.32
K18 6.3 k 0.16
K19 12.5 k 0.08
9-51
*2: specification of duty (specify using K constant)
If the control code is K0 to K19, the duty is K0 to K999 (0.0% to 99.9%).
If the control code is K20 to K24, the duty is K0 to K990 (0% to 99%).
Values are specified in units of 1% (K10) (digits behind the decimal point are rounded off).
Note:
• If a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed,
a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output. If written when instruction execution is started,
an operation error is occurred.
9-52
Chapter 10
High-speed counter, Pulse Output and
PWM Output functions
(For Ry Type)
10.1 Overview of Each Functions
Describes the functions of the relay type (Ry type) FP-X control unit.
10-2
PWM output function (Pulse I/O cassette)
By using the exclusive instruction, the PWM output
function enables a pulse output of the desired duty
ratio.
Counting range
• K-2, 147, 483, 648 to K+2, 147, 483, 647 (Coded 32-bit binary)
• The built-in high-speed counter is a ring counter. Consequently, if the counted value exceeds the
maximum value, it returns to the minimum value. Similarly, if the counted value drops below the
minimum value, it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there.
Note:
When the linear interpolation instruction F175 is used, the value for the amount of travel should be set so
that it is within the range indicated below.
-8,388,608 to +8,388,607 (Coded 24-bit binary)
10-3
10.2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items
10.2.1 Specifications
High-speed counter function
High-speed counter by the input of the main unit
Memory area being used Performance specifications
Maximum
Channel No. Input contact Control Elapsed Target Minimum input
Note1) counting
flag value area value area pulse width Note2)
speed
DT90300 DT90302
CH0 X0 R9110
DT90301 DT90303
DT90304 DT90306
CH1 X1 R9111
DT90305 DT90307
DT90308 DT90310
CH2 X2 R9112
DT90309 DT90311
DT90312 DT90314
[Single phase] CH3 X3 R9113
DT90313 DT90315
Incremental, 50 μs 10 kHz
DT90316 DT90318
Decremental CH4 X4 R9114
DT90317 DT90319
DT90320 DT90322
CH5 X5 R9115
DT90321 DT90323
DT90324 DT90326
CH6 X6 R9116
DT90325 DT90327
DT90328 DT90330
CH7 X7 R9117
DT90329 DT90331
X0 DT90300 DT90302
CH0 R9110
X1 DT90301 DT90303
[2-phase] X2 DT90308 DT90310
CH2 R9112
X3 DT90309 DT90311
2-phase input 100 μs 5 kHz
X4 DT90316 DT90318
One input CH4 R9114
X5 DT90317 DT90319
X6 DT90324 DT90326
CH6 R9116
X7 DT90325 DT90327
Related instructions:
F0(MV) :High-speed counter control
F1(DMV) :Read/write of elapsed value of high-speed counter
F166(HC1S) :Target value match on
F167(CH1R) :Target value match off
10-4
High-speed counter when using pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS)
Memory area being used Performance specifications
Input Elapsed Target Minimum
Channel No. Control Maximum
contact value value input pulse
Note1) flag Note2) counting speed
area area width
X100 DT90332 DT90334
CH8 R9118
(X102) DT90333 DT90335
X101 DT90336 DT90338 Single-phase 2
[Single phase] CH9 R9119
(X102) DT90337 DT90339 6.25 μs channels: 80 kHz
Incremental,
Decremental
CHA X200 DT90340 DT90342 (100 μs) Single-phase 4
Note4) R911A channels: 50 kHz
(X202) DT90341 DT90343
CHB X201 DT90344 DT90346
Note4) R911B
(X202) DT90345 DT90347
X100
[2-phase] DT90332 DT90334
CH8 X101 R9118 2-phase 1
2-phase input DT90333 DT90335
(X102) 16.7 μs channel: 30 kHz
One input
X200 (100 μs) 2-phase 2
Direction CHA DT90340 DT90342 channels: 25 kHz
Note4) X201 R911A
distinction DT90341 DT90343
(X202)
Related instructions:
F0(MV) :High-speed counter control
F1(DMV) :Read/write of elapsed value of high-speed counter
F166(HC1S) :Target value match on
F167(CH1R) :Target value match off
Note1) The values in parentheses are for the reset input. The reset input X102 can be set to either CH8
or CH9. The reset input X202 can be set to either CHA or CHB.
Note2) Reference: For information on minimum input pulse width,
<10.3.3 Minimum Input Pulse Width>.
Note3) When using the AFPX-PLS only
Note4) CHA/CHB can be used when 2 units of AFPX-PLS are installed.
10-5
Pulse output function
Pulse output when using pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS)
Input/output contact number used Memory area used
CCW Devi-
High-speed CW Near
or ation Elapsed Target
counter channel or Home home Control
dire- counter value value
No. pulse input input flag
ction clear Note4) area area
output
output output
Note2) Reference: For DT90052, see <10.4.4 Pulse Output Control Instruction (F0) (F1)>.
10-6
10.2.2 Functions Used and Restrictions
High-speed counter built in the control unit
2-phase Single-phase
No. of channels Max. frequency No. of channels Max. frequency
0 − 1 10 kHz
0 − 2 10 kHz
0 − 3 10 kHz
0 − 4 10 kHz
0 − 5 10 kHz
0 − 6 10 kHz
0 − 7 10 kHz
0 − 8 10 kHz
1 5 kHz 0 10 kHz
1 5 kHz 1 10 kHz
1 5 kHz 2 10 kHz
1 5 kHz 3 10 kHz
1 5 kHz 4 10 kHz
1 5 kHz 5 10 kHz
1 5 kHz 6 10 kHz
2 5 kHz 0 10 kHz
2 5 kHz 1 10 kHz
2 5 kHz 2 10 kHz
2 5 kHz 3 10 kHz
2 5 kHz 4 10 kHz
3 5 kHz 0 10 kHz
3 5 kHz 1 10 kHz
3 5 kHz 2 10 kHz
4 5 kHz 0 −
Conditions: When the duty is 50%, and the match on/off instruction is not used.
10-7
Restrictions on I/O allocations
• Various functions listed in the table of specifications cannot be allocated to one I/O at the same time.
• Except for the examples noted below, inputs and outputs that have been allocated to the various
functions cannot be allocated as normal inputs and outputs.
10-8
10.3 High-speed Counter Function
Two-phase input mode Individual input mode: only for pulse I/O
cassette
(Incremental/decremental input mode)
10-9
Count for reset input: only for pulse I/O cassette
(Incremental input mode)
10-10
10.3.4 I/O Allocation
• As shown in the table of specifications, the inputs and outputs used will differ depending on the
channel number being used.
• The output turned on and off can be specified with instructions F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) for
desired output relays (Yn:n<300).
When using CH8 of the pulse I/O cassette When using CH8 of the pulse I/O cassette
with incremental input and reset input with two-phase input and reset input
* The output turned on and off when the target * The output turned on and off when the target
value is reached can be specified as desired value is reached can be specified as desired
from the outputs of the main unit or add-on from the outputs of the main unit or add-on
cassette. cassette.
In the above program, the reset is performed in step (1) and 0 is entered just after that in step (2). The
count is now ready for operation. If it is only reset, counting will not be performed.
10-11
High-speed counter/pulse output control flag area of FP-X Ry type
10-12
Target value match ON instruction (F166)
Example 1:
If the elapsed value (DT90300 and DT90301)
for channel 0 matches K10000, output Y7 turns
on.
Example 2:
If the elapsed value (DT90308 and DT90309)
for channel 2 matches K20000, output Y6 turns
on.
Example 2:
If the elapsed value (DT90312 and DT90313)
for channel 3 matches K40000, output Y5 turns
off.
FP-X Ry type – Elapsed value and target value areas of high-speed counter ch0 to chB
High-speed counter
Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area
Channel No.
ch0 R9110 DT90300 to DT90301 DT90302 to DT90303
ch1 R9111 DT90304 to DT90305 DT90304 to DT90307
ch2 R9112 DT90308 to DT90309 DT90310 to DT90311
ch3 R9113 DT90312 to DT90313 DT90314 to DT90315
ch4 R9114 DT90316 to DT90317 DT90318 to DT90319
ch5 R9115 DT90320 to DT90321 DT90322 to DT90323
ch6 R9116 DT90324 to DT90325 DT90326 to DT90327
ch7 R9117 DT90328 to DT90329 DT90330 to DT90331
ch8 R9118 DT90332 to DT90333 DT90334 to DT90335
ch9 R9119 DT90336 to DT90337 DT90338 to DT90339
chA R911A DT90340 to DT90341 DT90342 to DT90343
chB R911B DT90344 to DT90345 DT90346 to DT90347
10-13
10.3.6 Sample program (Control Unit and Main Unit I/O)
Positioning operations with a single speed inverter
Wiring example
Program
When X5 is turned on, Y0 turns on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value (DT90300
and DT90301) reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.
10-14
Positioning operations with a double speed inverter
Wiring example
10-15
Program
When X5 is turned on, Y0 and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value
(DT90300 and DT90301) reaches K4500, Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating. When the
elapsed value reaches K5000, Y0 turns off and the conveyor stops.
10-16
10.3.7 Sample program (Pulse I/O Cassette)
Positioning operations with a single speed inverter
Wiring example
Program
When X102 is turned on, Y100 turns on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed value
(DT90332 and DT90333) reaches K5000, Y100 turns off and the conveyor stops.
10-17
Positioning operations with a double speed inverter
Wiring example
10-18
Program
When X102 is turned on, Y100 and Y101 turn on and the conveyor begins moving. When the elapsed
value (DT90332 and DT90333) reaches K4500, Y101 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating.
When the elapsed value reaches K5000, Y100 turns off and the conveyor stops.
10-19
10.4 Pulse Output Function (Pulse I/O Cassette)
Note:
• With the Ry type, the pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) is necessary to use the pulse I/O function.
10-20
10.4.2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes
Clockwise/counter-clockwise output method
Control is carried out using two
pulses: a forward rotation pulse and a
reverse rotation pulse.
Note:
The output signals are the numbers on the pulse I/O cassette.
When executing the pulse output, only pulses are output. The output memory Y100, Y200 and Y201is
not output.
10-21
Operation mode
Incremental <Relative value control>
Outputs the pulses set with the target value.
Selected
Pulse and direction Pulse and direction
Mode HSC counting
CW/CCW forward OFF/ forward ON/
Target Method
reverse ON reverse OFF
value
Pulse output when Pulse output when
Pulse output
Positive direction output is direction output is Incremental
from CW
OFF ON
Pulse output when Pulse output when
Pulse output
Negative direction output is direction output is Decremental
from CCW
ON OFF
Example:
When the current position (value of elapsed value area) is 5000, the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by
executing the pulse output instruction with the target value +1000, and the current position will be 6000.
Home return
• When executing the F171 (SPDH) instruction, the pulse is continuously output until the home input
(X102 or X202) is enabled.
• To decelerate the movement when near the home position, designate a near home input and set bit 4
of special data register DT90052 to off → on → off.
• The deviation counter clear output can be output when home return has been completed.
JOG operation
• Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for F172 (PLSH) instruction is in the ON
state. Also, the pulse output can be stopped when the specified target value is matched.
• The direction output and output frequency are specified by F172 (PLSH) instruction.
10-22
Precautions on programming
Address Flag conditions The uses of the flag in the program
Use this to prohibit the simultaneous
Turns on during execution of pulse output
R911C execution of other high-speed counter
instructions and then maintains that state
Control flag instructions and pulse output
during pulse output from CH0. This flag is
(CH0) instructions, and to verify completion
the same for instructions F166 to F175.
of an action.
Use this to prohibit the simultaneous
Turns on during execution of pulse output
R911D execution of other high-speed counter
instructions and then maintains that state
Control flag instructions and pulse output
during pulse output from CH0. This flag is
(CH1) instructions, and to verify completion
the same for instructions F166 to F175.
of an action.
Note:
• The above flags vary during scanning.
Example: If the above flags are used for more than one time as input conditions, there may be the
different states in the same scan. Replace with internal relays at the beginning of the program as a
measure.
10-23
10.4.3 I/O Allocation
Double pulse input driver
(CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method)
• Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for “CW, CCW”.
• The I/O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used.
• Set the control code for F171 (SPDH) instruction to “CW/CCW”.
<When using CH0> <When using CH1>
* Input such as X100 or X101 on the pulse I/O * Input such as X200 or X201 on the pulse I/O
cassette can be specified for the near home cassette can be specified for the near home
input. input.
Note) If there is no input remained on the pulse I/O cassette, the input of the main unit can be used.
* Input such as X100 or X101 on the pulse I/O * Input such as X200 or X201 on the pulse I/O
cassette can be specified for the near home cassette can be specified for the near home
input. input.
10-24
10.4.4 Pulse output control instructions (F0) (F1)
Pulse output control instruction (F0)
• This instruction is used for resetting the built-in high-speed counter, stopping the pulse output, and
setting and resetting the near home input.
• Specify this F0 (MV) instruction together with special data register DT90052.
• Once this instruction is executed, the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again.
Example 1:
Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration.
In case of CH0
Example 2:
Performing a forced stop of the pulse output.
In case of CH0
10-25
Key Point: High-speed counter/pulse output control flag area of FP-X Ry type
• The area DT90052 for writing channels and
control codes is allocated as shown in the left
figure.
• Control codes written with an F0 (MV)
instruction are stored by channel in special
data register DT90372 and DT90373.
Note) The output counting value of the elapsed
value area may be different from the input
counting value of the motor side if the
pulse output is stopped by the
“Continue/stop of pulse output”. After the
pulse output stops, execute the home
return.
Reference: <10.2.1 Table of specifications> for information on the special data register.
Example 1:
Writing the elapsed value
Set the initial value of K3000 in the pulse output
CH0.
FP-X Ry type - Elapsed value and target value areas of pulse output ch0 to ch1
Pulse output
Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area
Channel No.
ch0 R911C DT90348 to DT90349 DT90350 to DT90351
ch1 R911D DT90352 to DT90353 DT90354 to DT90355
10-26
10.4.5 Wiring for Pulse Output Sample Program (F171 to F174)
Wiring example
Note) When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type, connect a 2 kΩ (1/2 W) resistor with
the R1 and a 2 kΩ (1/2 W) to 470 Ω (2 W) resistor with the R2.
10-27
10.4.6 Positioning Control Instruction F171 - Trapezoidal
• This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table.
10-28
10-29
Sample program
Incremental Position Control Operation: Plus Direction
When X0 turns on, the pulse is output from CW output Y100 of the specified channel CH0.
Note) In that case, the memory Y100 does not turn on/off according to the pulse output, and also the
monitoring is not possible.
Program
10-30
Incremental Position Control Operation: Minus Direction
When X1 turns on, the pulse is output from CCW output Y101 of the specified channel CH0.
Note) In that case, the memory Y101 does not turn on/off according to the pulse output.
Program
10-31
Absolute position control operation
When X1 is turned on, pulses are output from CW output Y100 or CCW output Y101 of the specified
channel CH0. If the current value at that point is larger than 22000, the pulses are output from Y101, and
if the value is smaller than 22000, the pulses are output from Y100.
Note) In that case, the memory Y100 or Y101 does not turn on/off according to the pulse output, and
also the monitoring is not possible.
Program
10-32
10.4.7 Positioning Control Instruction F171 – Home Return (Common to
Transistor type)
• This function performs home return according to the specified data table. The elapsed value area CH0
(DT90348, DT90349) and CH1 (DT90352, DT90353) is cleared to zero after the completion of home
return.
10-33
10-34
Home return operation modes
There are two operation modes for a home return with the FP-X: Type I and Type II.
Reference:
The Pulse output control instruction (F0) is used for the near home input.
<10.4.4 Pulse output control instructions (F0) (F1)>.
10-35
Sample program
Home return operation using CH0: Minus direction
When X2 turns on, a pulse is output from CCW output Y101 of the specified channel CH0 and the return
to home begins. When X100 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X102 turns on, home return is
completed. After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT90349 are
cleared to 0.
Program
10-36
Sample program
Home return operation using CH1: Plus direction
When X3 turns on, a pulse is output from CW output Y200 of the specified channel CH1 and the return
to home begins. When X200 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X202 turns on, home return is
completed. After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90352 and DT90353 are
cleared to 0.
Program
10-37
10.4.8 Pulse Output Instruction F172 – JOG operation
• This instruction is used for JOG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when the
execution condition (trigger) turns on.
10-38
Key Point:
The FP-X supports two operation modes for JOG operation, one in which no target value is specified,
and one in which feed stops when the target value is reached.
10-39
Sample program
JOG operation : Plus direction
While X3 is in the ON state, a pulse is output from the CW output Y100 of the specified channel CH0.
Program
10-40
JOG operation : Minus direction
While X4 is in the ON state, a pulse is output from the CCW output Y101 of the specified channel CH0.
Program
Reference:
The pulse output control instruction (F0) is used for the pulse output stop.
<10.4.4 Pulse output control instruction (F0) (F1)>
10-41
10.4.9 Positioning Control Instruction F174 – Data Table Control
• Positioning is performed according to the specified data table.
10-42
10-43
10.4.10 Pulse Output Instruction F175 – Linear Interpolation
• The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table.
Note:
The linear interpolation function can be used only when 2 units of the AFPX-PLS are being used.
10-44
10-45
Sample program of interpolation control
Wiring example
Note) When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type, connect a 2 kΩ (1/2 W) resistor with
the R1 and a 2 kΩ (1/2 W) to 470 Ω (2 W) resistor with the R2.
10-46
Restrictions on positioning data setting
• Designate settings for the target position and moving amount so they are within the following range.
Allowable range: -8,388,608 to +8,388,608
• When using in combination with other positioning instructions like F171, designate so the target value
is within the above range, even in those instructions.
Sample program
Continuous interpolation control
• Using the linear interpolation function, perform positioning control that draws trajectory like the one
shown below.
Relay allocation
Relay No. Description Relay No. Description
X1 Positioning start R9010 Always ON
X2 Emergency stop switch R911C Pulse output flag (CH0)
R20 From P1 to P2 start R911D Pulse output flag (CH1)
R21 From P2 to P3 start
R22 From P3 to P4 start
R23 From P4 to P1 start
R2F Positioning done
10-47
Program
10-48
Home return operation (Minus direction)
When X0 turns on, the pulse is output from CCW output Y101 of the specified channel CH0 and CCW
output Y201 of the specified channel CH1, and the return to home begins.
In CH0, when X100 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X102 turns on, home return is completed.
After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT90349 are cleared to 0.
In CH1, when X200 turns on, deceleration begins, and when X202 turns on, home return is completed.
After the return to home is completed, the elapsed value areas DT90352 and DT90353 are cleared to 0.
When the operations in both CHs is completed, the return to home completes.
10-49
Program
Key Point:
As there is not interpolation function for the home return, the home return should be executed for each
channel. After the home return for both channels is completed, the positioning operation running
program (R40) turns off.
10-50
10.5 PWM Output Function (Pulse I/O Cassette)
Note:
With the FP-X Ry type, the pulse I/O cassette (AFPX-PLS) is necessary to use the pulse output function.
Data table
DT100 Control code *1 : K1
DT101 Duty *2 : 50%
*1: Specify the control code by setting the K constant.
Resolution of 1000 Resolution of 100
K Frequency (Hz) Period (ms) K Frequency (Hz) Period (ms)
K0 1.5 666.67 K20 15.6 k 0.06
K1 2.0 502.51 K21 20.8 k 0.05
K2 4.1 245.70 K22 25.0 k 0.04
K3 6.1 163.93 K23 31.3 k 0.03
K4 8.1 122.85 K24 41.7 k 0.02
K5 9.8 102.35
K6 19.5 51.20
K7 48.8 20.48
K8 97.7 10.24
K9 201.6 4.96
K10 403.2 2.48
K11 500.0 2.00
K12 694.4 1.44
K13 1.0 k 0.96
K14 1.3 k 0.80
K15 1.6 k 0.64
K16 2.1 k 0.48
K17 3.1 k 0.32
K18 6.3 k 0.16
K19 12.5 k 0.08
10-51
*2: specification of duty (specify using K constant)
If the control code is K0 to K19, the duty is K0 to K999 (0.0% to 99.9%).
If the control code is K20 to K24, the duty is K0 to K990 (0% to 99%).
Values are specified in units of 1% (K10) (digits behind the decimal point are rounded off).
Note:
• If a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed,
a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output. If written when instruction execution is started,
an operation error is occurred.
10-52
Chapter 11
Security Functions
11.1 Type of Security Functions
There are mainly two functions as the security function of the FP-X.
It is possible to rewrite data during any of these functions is being used.
• 4-digit password: 4 characters of 16 characters that are “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” can be used.
• 8-digit password: A maximum of 8 English one byte characters (case-sensitive) and symbols
can be used.
2: Upload protection
Ladder programs or system registers cannot be uploaded from the FP-X by setting that the
program is not uploaded. As transferring programs to the master memory cassette as well as the
programming tool will be unperformable, it ensures higher security.
The state of the security can be checked at two displays of the programming tool FPWIN GR.
1. Select [Online Edit Mode] under the [Online] on the menu bar, or press the [CTRL] and [F2] keys at
the same time, to switch to the [Online] screen.
2. Select “Security information” or “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar.
Current status
Indicates the current status of the password setting. There are following five statuses.
Note:
If the power supply of the PLC is turned on/off with the setting that the access is allowed, the setting will
be that the PLC is protected again.
11-3
Setting the Password protect function
As the dialog box is shown, select as below.
Digit number:
Select “4 digits” or “8 digits”.
Operation Mode:
Select “Protect”.
Click “Settings”.
Digit number:
Select “4 digits” or “8 digits”.
Operation Mode:
Select “Access”.
Click “Settings”.
Note:
If the power supply of the PLC is turned on/off with the setting that the access is allowed, the setting will
be that the PLC is protected again.
11-4
How to cancel the password setting
Following two methods are available to cancel the password setting.
Description Program
Unprotect Cancels the registered password to be specified. All programs are retained.
All programs are deleted.
Erases all programs and security information to
Force cancel (The upload protection setting is
cancel the setting forcibly.
also deleted.)
Digit number:
Select “4 digits” or “8 digits”.
Operation Mode:
Select “Unprotect”.
Click “Settings”.
Click [OK].
Click [Yes].
11-5
About the password data of the master memory cassette (AFPX-MRTC)
The data on the password setting can be transferred to the master memory cassette together with the
programs from the FP-X.
The password information stored in the master memory cassette will be automatically transferred to
another control unit when it is installed, and the control unit will be protected.
1. Turn off the power supply of the PLC, and set the RUN/PROG mode switch to the PROG mode. Install
the master memory cassette to transfer the program on the control unit.
2. 2. Turn on the power supply of the PLC, and transfer the program to the master memory cassette
using “Internal memory => Master memory” in the programming tool.
Reference:
For the information on the transmission to the master memory cassette,
<12.2.2 Master Memory Function>
11-6
11.3 Upload Protection
This function is to prohibit reading programs and system registers by setting to disable program
uploading on the FP-X.
If the FP-X is set to prohibit program uploading, note that the ladder programs and system registers will
be disalbed to be uploaded after that.
However, editing the files that are controlled with a PC can be carried out online using the programming
tool. Note that the programs will be broken if the programs are not absolutely matched.
When using this function, store ladder programs as files without fail.
Click “Execute”.
11-7
Specifying the information on upload protection in the master memory cassette
Programs cannot be transferred from the FP-X prohibited uploading to the master memory
cassette.
The upload protection can be set to the master memory cassette from the FP-X that is not prohibited
uploading using the “Internal memory to Master memory” function of the programming tool.
At that time, if there is the information on the password protect, it will be transferred simultaneously.
If the master memory cassette that is prohibited uploading is installed on another FP-X, the information
on the settings will be transferred to the FP-X automatically, therefore, that FP-X will be prohibited
uploading as well.
Reference: For the information on the transmission to the master memory cassette,
<12.2.2 Master Memory Function>
Note:
1. If the setting for the upload protection is cancelled, all ladder programs, system registers and
password information will be deleted.
2. If “Force Cancel” is executed in the setting for PLC password, the setting for the upload protection will
be also cancelled.
11-8
11.4 Table of Security Settings/Cancel
When the master memory cassette is not installed on the FP-X control unit
Status of security
Security not Upload 4-digit 8-digit
set protection password password
Upload protection A A A
Sets/
4-digit password A A N/A
Cancels
8-digit password A A N/A
When the master memory cassette is installed on the FP-X control unit
Status of security
Security not Upload 4-digit 8-digit
set protection password password
Upload protection N/A N/A N/A
Sets/
4-digit password N/A N/A N/A
Cancels
8-digit password N/A N/A N/A
A: Available, N/A: Not available
11-9
11-10
Chapter 12
Other Functions
12.1 Transfer Function between Memories
Flow of program informaion
12-2
12.2 Function of Master Memory Cassette
The realtime clock (calendar timer function) to set year, month, day, day of week and time, and the
master memory is equipped in the master memory cassette.
The following 2 methods can be selected with the switch at the back.
Note:
It cannot be used as master memory when it has been specified to be used as realtime clock only.
Install the optional battery in the control unit to use the realtime clock.
The realtime clock does not work without the battery.
Specifications
Item Specifications
Year, month, day hour (24-hour display), minute, second and
Setting items
day of week
Realtime clock At 0 °C: less than 104 seconds per month
Accuracy At 25 °C: less than 51 seconds per month
At 55 °C: less than 155 seconds per month
12-3
Setting of Realtime clock
There are two ways to set the realtime clock function, as described below.
Note:
No values have been set in the default settings, so the programming tool or another means must be
used to specify the values.
The hour data is stored in the upper 8 bits of DT90053 and the minute data in the lower 8 bits, in the
BCD format. This hour and minute data is compared with the appointed time (BCD), and the R900B
(=flag) special internal relay is used to detect whether or not it matches the appointed time.
30-second compensation
The compensation for 30 seconds is performed in the DT90058.
12-5
Select the data to be simultaneously transferred with programs and registers
Reference: For the details on the F12 (ICRD) and P13 (ICWT) instructions,
<Programming Manual ARCT1F353>
12-6
12.2.4 Handling of Master Memories Created with Different Models
PLC that created master memory
Ry type Tr type
C14 C30 C60 C14 C30 C60
C14 A E25 E25 E25
Ry type C30 A A A E25 E25 E25
Installed C60 A A A E25 E25 E25
PLC C14 E25 E25 E25 A
Tr type C30 E25 E25 E25 A A A
C60 E25 E25 E25 A A A
A: Can be installed and operated.
: Can be installed depending on the program capacity.
E25: Master memory model unmatch error
Note1) If the E25 occurs, the mode will not be the RUN.
Also, the transfer operation from the master memory to the internal memory of the controller will
not be executed.
The transfer operation from the internal memory of the controller to the master memory can be
executed even if the E25 occurs.
Note2) If the version of the Ry type is older than Ver2.0, the E26 (User’s ROM errro) is detected not the
E25.
Note3) Use the tool software to execute the program conversion between different models.
12-7
12.3 P13 (ICWT) Instruction
Data registers of 32765 words can be stored and used in the built-in ROM (F-ROM data area) of
the FP-X control unit using the P13 (ICWT) instruction.
2. The power supply turns off when the P13 (ICWT) instruction is being executed.
If the power supply turns off during this instruction is being executed, the hold type area may not be kept.
(Also, when the power is shut off during rewriting in the RUN mode, the same event may occur.)
12-8
12.4 Analog Potentiometer
12-9
12.5 Sampling Trace Function
12.5.1 Overview
The FP-X control unit Ver2.0 and later versions support the sampling trace function.
Using this function enables to take samplings and record (accumulate) the state of artibrary data of 16
bits + 3 data registered in the PLC at an arbitrary timing, and to examine the changes in the bit and data
in details after stopping sampling at an arbitrary timing.
The sampling trace function is used in the time chart monitor function under the online menu of the
FPWIN-GR.
The instructions, functions, special relays and special registers related to the sampling trace
function are as below.
F155(SMPL) sampling instruction
F156(STRG) sampling stop trigger instruction
Time charge monitor of FPWIN GR
Note: It is not possible to activate the sampling at regular time intervals and the sampling by the
F155(SMPL) instruction simultaneously.
If the stop trigger activates, the PLC will continue to take samplings for the specified No. of delay, and
then stop the sampling operaton. Once the sampling operation stops, the data will be automatically
retrieved by the tool software and will be indicated in a time chart.
It is possible to adjust whether to see before or after the trigger point by the setting of the No. of delay.
12-10
Operation image of sampling trace
12-11
(3) Start monitoring. Start with the button.
2. Sampling by instruction
(1) Register the bit/word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN-GR.
(2) Specify the sampling configurations.
Set the mode of the sampling configurations to “Trace”.
Set the sampling rate (time) to 0.
Stop monitoring. (Stop with the button, stop by the “Trigger Break” in the menu, or stop by the F156
instruction.)
Note:
• The input signal of X contact is retrieved at the timing of the normal I/O update.
• If the partial update instruction is ececuted for the input in tehtime constant processing, the time
constant processing will be invalid, and the input status at the time will be read out and set.
• The time constant processing can be performed for the input other than X0 to X1F (add-on cassettes
or expansion units) by the F182 (FILTR) instruciton.
• The time constant processing is invalid when the high-speed counter, pulse catch or interrupt has been
specified.
12-13
12-14
Chapter 13
Self-Diagnostic and Troubleshooting
13.1 Self-Diagnostic function
LED status
Operation
ERROR/ Description
RUN PROG. statuss
ALARM
Light (on) Off Off Normal operation Operation
PROG. mode
Off Light (on) Off LED does not flash even if the forcing Stop
Normal
output is performed in program mode.
condition
Forcing input/output in Run mode
Flashes Flashes Off Flashes RUN and PROG. LED Operation
alternately.
Light (on) Off Flashes When a self-diagnostic error occurs Operation
Abnormal Off Light (on) Flashes When a self-diagnostic error occurs Stop
condition Light (on) Light (on) Light System watchdog timer has been
Stop
or off or off (on) activated
LED status
Description
POWER I/F ERROR
Normal
Light (on) Light (on) Off Normal operation
condition
Light (on) Flashes Off FP0 expansion unit is not connected.
The FP0 expansion unit, that had been connected
when the powr supply for the FP-X control unit turned
on, came away.
Abnormal Light (on) Light (on) Flashes
An error has occurred in the communication of data
condition
between the expansion FP0 adapter and FP0
expansion unit due to noise, etc.
The expansion FP0 adapter turned on later than the
Light (on) Off Off
FP-X control unit.
13-2
13.1.2 Operation Mode When an Error Occurs
• Normally, when an error occurs, the operation stops.
• For some errors, the user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped by setting the
system registers. You can set the error which operation is to be continued or stopped using the
programming toolshoftware as shown below.
13-3
13.2 Troubleshooting
Using FPWIN GR
With the FPWIN GR, if a PLC error occurs during programming or debugging and the RUN mode is
changed to the PROG. mode, the following status display dialog box is displayed automatically. Check
the contents of the self-diagnosed error.
Key Point:
To display the status display dialog box, select “Status Display” under “Online” on the menu bar.
Procedure 2
<For error code is 1 to 9>
- Condition
There is a syntax error in the program.
- Operation 1
Change to PROG. mode and clear the error.
- Operation 2
Execute a total-check function using FPWIN GR to determine the location of the syntax error.
13-4
<For error code is 42 (1)>
- Condition
The expansion unit or add-on cassette that had been connected when the power supply of the control
unit was turned on has come off, or the expansion unit has powered off.
- Operation 1
Turn off the power supply of the control unit, and connect the expansion unit and add-on cassette.
- Operation 2
Turn on the power supply of the expansion unit.
Using FPWIN GR
Click on the “Clear Error” button in the “Status display dialog box”. Error code 43 and higher can be
cleared.
• In the PROG. mode, the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error, but all of
the contents of the operation memory except hold type data arecleared.
• An error can also be cleared by executing a self-diagnostic error set instruction F148 (ERR).
Key Point:
When an operation error (error code 45) occurs, the address at which the error occurred is stored in
special data registers DT90017 and DT90018. If this happens, click on the “Operation Err” button in the
“Status display dialog box” and confirm the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the
error.
Procedure 1
Set the mode selector of PLC from RUN to PROG. mode and turn the power off and then on.
• If the ERROR LED is turned on again, there is probably an abnormality in the FP-X control unit. Please
contact your dealer.
• If the ERROR LED is flashed, go to chapter 11.2.1.
Procedure 2
Set the mode selector from PROG. to RUN mode.
• If the ERROR LED is turned on, the program execution time is too long. Check the program.
Check
(1) Check if instructions such as “JMP” or “LOOP” are pgrogrammed in such a way that a scan never
finish.
(2)Check if interrupt instructions are executed in succession.
13-5
13.2.3 ALL LEDs are OFF
Procedure 1
Check wiring of power supply.
Procedure 2
Check if the power supplied to the FP-X control unit is in the range of the rating.
• Be sure to check the fluctuation in the power supply.
Procedure 3
Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FP-X control unit is
shared with them.
• If the LED on the control unit turn on at this moment, increase the capacity of the power supply or
prepare another power supply for other devices.
• Please contact your dealer for further questions.
13-6
13.2.4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction
Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side.
Check
(1) Check for the duplicated use of output. Check whether the output has been rewritten using the high-
level instruction.
(2)Check the program flow when a control instruction such as MCR or JMP is used.
13-7
13.2.5 A Protect Error Message Appears
When a password function is used
Procedure
Enter a password in the “Set PLC Password” menu in FPWIN GR and turn on the “Access” radio button.
Using FPWIN GR
(1)Select “Set PLC Password” under “Tool” on the menu bar.
(2)The PLC password setting dialog box shown below is displayed. Turn on the radio button next to
“Access”, enter a password, and click on the “Settings” button.
Note:
The password setting can be specified when the PLC is being connected online.
Procedure 1
Check if the ERROR LED is flashing.
Example:
If the ERROR LED is flashing, check <13.2.1 If ERROR LED is flashing>.
Procedure 2
Execute a total-check function using the tool software to determine the location of the syntax error.
Using FPWIN GR
Select “Debug” on the menu bar, and select “Totally check program”. Click on the “Execute” button in the
total check dialog box.
13-8
13.2.7 A Communication Error has Occurred through RS485
Procedure 1
Check to make sure the transmission cables have been securely connected between the two (+)
terminals and two (−) terminals of the units, and that the final unit has been correctly connected.
Procedure 2
Check if the transmission cables are within the specifications range. At this point, make sure all of the
cables in the link are of the same type, and that multiple types of cables are not being used.
• Do not designate any unit other than those at both ends of the network as a terminal station.
Procedure 3
Check that link areas do not overlap.
Example:
For the specifications range of the transmission cables, <5.8.1 Selection of Transmission Cables>.
Procedure 1
Check if the receive data terminal of a connected device is connected to the SD and the send data
terminal is connected to the RD. Check if the SG is connected.
Procedure 2
1. Check if the CS signal is on.
2. When the “CS” of the communication cassette LED does not light, the CS signal is not on.
3. If the three-wire type is used, connect the RS signal and the CS signal of the communication cassette,
and turn the CS signal on.
Note) For COM1 only.
Procedure 3
Check that link areas do not overlap.
Procedure 4
When the RS232C is either one of the followings, check if “COM. cassette” is selected for “Port
selection”.
1. When controling the 1-channel type RS232C with 5-wire type.
2. When using the COM2 port with the 2-channel type RS232C
3. Whe using the COM2 port with the 1-channel RS485 and 1-channel RS232C.
4. When using the COM2 port with the Ethernet and 1-channel RS232C.
Procedure 5
Check that the baud rate is set to 9600 bps, 19200 bps or 115200 bps for the COM2 port of the 2-
channel type RS485. The settings of the system register and the cassette backside switch should be the
same.
13-9
13.2.9 A Communication Error has Occurred through RS422
Condition: No communication with 1-channel type RS232C/RS422 cassette (AFPX-COM3)
Procedure 1
Check to make sure the transmission cables have been securely connected between the two (+)
terminals and two (−) terminals of the units, and that the final unit has been correctly connected.
Procedure 2
Check if the transmission cables are within the specifications range. At this point, make sure all of the
cables in the link are of the same type, and that multiple types of cables are not being used.
• Do not designate any unit other than those at both ends of the network as a terminal station.
Procedure 3
Check that link areas do not overlap.
Example:
For the specifications range of the transmission cables, <5.8.1 Selection of Transmission Cables>.
Procedure 2
Check if the expansion FP0 adapter is installed at the last position.
When the expansion FP0 adapter is installed at the last position, the terminal setting for other expansion
unit is not necessary.
Procedure 3
Check if the power supply has turned on and off in a short time such as momentary power failure.
There is a possibility that the expansion unit has not been recognized due to the occurrence of
momentary power failure.
Turn off and on the power supply again.
13-10
13.2.11 A Communication Error has Occurred through Ethernet
Condition: No communication with Ethernet port of Ethernet + 1-channel type RS232C
(AFPX-COM5)
Procedure 1
Check if the LAN cable is securely connected to each unit or a PC.
When using a HUB for the connection, check if the power supply of the HUB is on.
Procedure 2
Check if the LINK/ACT LED lights up.
- When the LED is off, the LAN cable is not connected correctly.
Procedure 3
Check the IP addresses and the destination.
Procedure 4
Check if the communication format and baud rate for the COM1 port of the FP-X matches the
configuration setting of the AFPX-COM5.
Procedure 1
Check the status with the Configurator WD.
- If the “IP duplicate error” is indicated for the status, the IP address may be duplicate on the network.
Specify an IP address that is not duplicate.
- If the “DHCP error” is indicated for the status, getting IP from the DHCP server has been failed. Check
if there is no problem on the network system.
13-11
13-12
Chapter 14
Precautions During Programming
14.1 Use of Duplicated Output
14.1.2 When Output is Repeated with an OT, KP, SET or RST Instruction
Condition of internal and output relays during operation
• When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such as transfer
instructions and OT, KP, SET and RST instructions, the contents are rewritten at each step during
operation.
<Exmaple>
Processing when SET, RST and OT instructions are used (X0 to X2 are all on).
14-2
The output is determined by the final operation results
• If the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT, KP, SET, RST or data transfer
functions, the output obtained at the I/O update is determined by the final results of the operation.
<Exmaple>
Output to the same output relay Y0 with OT, KP, SET and RST instructions.
• If you need to output a result while processing is still in progress, use a partial I/O update instruction
(F143).
14-3
14.2 Handling BCD Data
14-4
14.3 Handling Index Registers
<Example>
Transferring the contents of data register DT100 to the number specified by the contents of an
index register.
In this example, the number of the destination data register varies depending on the contents of I0 with
DT0 acting as a base. For example, when I0 contains K10, the destination will be DT10, and when I0 is
K20, the destination will be DT20.
• In this way, index registers allow the specification of multiple memory areas with a single instruction,
and thus index registers are very convenient when handling large amounts of data.
14-5
14.3.3 Example of Using an Index Register
Repeatedly reading in external data
<Example>
Writing the contents of input WX3 to a sequence of data registers beginning from DT0.
Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register I0.
Convert the BCD timer set value in WX0 to binary and store in the timer set value area SV specified
by contents of I0.
<Example 2>
Taking external output of the elapsed value in a timer number specified by a digital switch
Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register I0.
Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified by I0 to BCD, and output it to output relay
WY0.
14-6
14.4 Operation Errors
• An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG. mode, however, the contents of the
operation memory except the hold type data will be cleared.
• An error can also be cleared by executing a self-diagnostic error set instruction (F148).
• If the mode selector is set to “RUN”, RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared. So if the cause of
the error is not removed, the error may seem not to be cleared.
14-7
14.4.4 Points to Check in Program
1. Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register.
<Example> When a data register is modified using an index register
In this case, index register modifies the address of data register DT0. If data in I0 is too large, it will
exceed the addressable range of the data register. The last address of the data register is DT32764, so
if the contents of I0 exceeds 32764, an operation error will occur. The same is true when the contents of
I0 are a negative value.
2. Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD ↔ BIN data conversion?
<Example> When BCD-to-BIN conversion is attempted
In this case, if DT0 contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F such as 12A4,
conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result.
In this case, if DT1 contains a negative value or a value greater than K9999, an operation error will occur.
In this case, if the content of DT100 is “0”, an operation error will occur.
14-8
14.5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method
Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions, such
as:
1. MC and MCE instructions
2. JP and LBL instructions
3. LOOP and LBL instructions
4. CNDE instruction
5. Step ladder instructions
6. Subroutine instructions
14-9
14.5.2 Operation and Precautions When RUN Starts
Operation of first scan after RUN begins
• The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been switched to the RUN
mode, or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode, if the trigger (execution condition) is
already on.
• If you need to execute an instruction when the trigger (execution condition) is on prior to switching to
RUN mode, make a program as below using R9014 (initial pulse off relay). (R9014 is a special internal
relay which is off during the first scan and turns on at the second scan.)
14-10
14.5.3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction
• If a leading edge detection instruction is in a control instruction, it will be executed only under the
following condition: The leading edge detection instruction was off when the execution condition of the
previous control instruction was reset, and the leading edge detection instruction is on when the
execution condition of the current control instruction becomes on.
• When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes the order of
instruction execution such as MC, MCE, JP or LBL, the operation of the instruction may change as
follows depending on input timing. Take care regarding this point.
14-11
<Example 2> Using the CT instruction between JP and LBL instructions
14-12
14.6 Precautions for Programming
Programs which are not executed correctly
Do not write the following programs as they will not be executed correctly.
<Example 1>
<Example 2>
<Example 3>
When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger (execution condition) of a differential instruction
(DF) or timer instruction, do not use an AND stack (ANS) instruction, read stack (RDS) instruction, or
pop stack (POPS) instruction.
14-13
14.7 Rewrite Function During RUN
14-14
14.7.2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not Possible
When the timeout error message is indicated:
Even if the timeout error message is indicated, it is highly possible that the program in PLC has been
already rewritten. Carry out the following operations.
When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series programmable display.
Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN.
(The default setting is 5 seconds.)
14-15
Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN
1. When the result of rewriting is a syntax error.
<Example>
When executing the rewriting which does not form the following pair of instructions.
1. Step ladder instructions (SSTP/STPE)
2. Subroutine instructions (SUB/RET)
3. Interrupt instructions (INT/IRET)
4. JP/LBL
5. LOOP/LBL
6. MC/MCE
Also, rewritng is not possible during RUN in case of other syntax errors.
Interrupt restrictions
When using interrupt, high-speed counter, pulse output or PWM output functions, do not perform a
rewrite during RUN.
If a rewrite during RUN is executed, the operation as below will be performed. Exercise caution.
1. Interrupt programs will be disabled. Enable by executing an ICTL instruction once again.
<Example> Using R9034 (rewrite during RUN completed flag)
14-16
14.7.3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN
FPWIN GR FPWIN GR
Item
Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode
Maximum jof 128 steps. Rewriting performed by step.
Changes are performed by block. Caution is required as rewriting
When PG conversion is executed takes place simultaneously with
online, the program will be the change.
rewritten.
Rewrite procedure
14-17
FPWIN GR FPWIN GR
Item
Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode
A distance with the same number Writign and deletion of a single
cannot be defined twice. instruction is not possible for a
An SSTP instruction cannot be program with no step ladder area.
written in a subprogram. Write or delete both instructions
simultaneously in FPWIN GR
SSTP/STPE
ladder symbol mode.
Operation
In the case of an SSTP instruction
of each
only, writing and deletion of a
instruciton
single instruction is possible for a
program with a step ladder area.
Be sure to write the instruction for Write in the order: JP-LBL or
JP/LOOP/ setting the loop number before LOOP-LBL
LBL LBL-LOOP instructions. Delete in the order: LBL-JP or
LBL-LOOP
14-18
14.8 Processing During Forced Input and Output
15-2
Item Description
5 to 9 Hz, single amplitude of 3.5 mm, 1 cycle/min
Vibration resistance
9 to 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 9.8 m/s2, 1 cycle/min, 10 min on 3 axes
Shock resistance Shock of 147 m/s2, 4 times on 3 axes
1500 Vp-p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1µs (based on in-house
AC
Noise measurements) (AC power supply terminal)
immunity 1000 Vp-p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1µs (based on in-house
DC
measurements) (DC power supply terminal)
Operation condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust
Conformed EC
EMC: EN61131-2, LVD: EN61131-2
directive
Overvoltage category Category II
Pollution level Pollution level 2
Note1) Not isolated between the tool port, USB port, Analog input cassette and Communication cassette
(RS232C part).
Note2) Cutoff current: 5 mA (Factory default setting)
Note3) Excluding between the Analog input cassette, Communication cassette (RS232C part) and
protection earth terminal.
Note4) Excluding between the input terminal and the output terminal of the pulse I/O cassette.
Service Power Supply for Input (Output) (Used for AC power supply type only)
Specifications
Item
C14 C30/C60/E30
Rated output voltage 24 V DC
Voltage regulation range 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Rated output current 0.15 A 0.4 A
Overcurrent protection
Available
function Note)
Terminal screw M3
Note) This is a function to protect overcurernt temporarily. If a current load that is out of the
specifications is connected, it may lead to damages.
15-3
DC power supply
Specifications
Item
C14 C30/C60
Rated voltage 24 V DC
Voltage regulation range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC
Inrush current 12 A or less (at 25 °C)
Momentary power off time 10 ms
Internal power supply part
20,000 h (at 55 °C)
Guaranteed life
Fuse Built-in (Cannot be replaced)
Insulation system Transformer insulation
Terminal screw M3
Weight
Unit Model No. Weight Unit Model No. Weight
AFPX-C14R Approx. 280 g COM1 AFPX-COM1
AFPX-C14RD Approx. 260 g COM2 AFPX-COM2 Approx.
AFPX-C14T Approx. 270 g FP-X COM3 AFPX-COM3 20 g
AFPX-C14TD Approx. 250 g Communi- COM4 AFPX-COM4
AFPX-C14P Approx. 270 g cation Approx.
COM5 AFPX-COM5
AFPX-C14PD Approx. 250 g cassette 25 g
AFPX-C30R Approx. 490 g Approx.
COM6 AFPX-COM6
AFPX-C30RD Approx. 470 g 20 g
Control AFPX-C30T Approx. 460 g Analog input cassette AFPX-AD2
unit AFPX-C30TD Approx. 440 g Analog output
AFPX-DA2
AFPX-C30P Approx. 460 g cassette
AFPX-C30PD Approx. 440 g Analog I/O cassette AFPX-A21
AFPX-C60R Approx. 780 g Thermocouple
AFPX-TC2 Approx.
AFPX-C60RD Approx. 760 g cassette
25 g
AFPX-C60T Approx. 700 g Input cassette AFPX-IN8
AFPX-C60TD Approx. 680 g AFPX-TR8
Output cassette
AFPX-C60P Approx. 700 g AFPX-TR6P
AFPX-C60PD Approx. 680 g I/O cassette AFPX-IN4T3
AFPX-E16X Approx. 190 g Pulse I/O cassette AFPX-PLS
AFPX-E14YR Approx. 230 g Master memory Approx.
AFPX-MRTC
AFPX-E16R Approx. 195 g cassette 20 g
AFPX-E16T Approx. 180 g FP-X backup battery AFPX-BATT Approx. 7 g
AFPX-E16P Approx. 180 g
Expansion
AFPX-E30R Approx. 470 g
I/O unit
AFPX-E30RD Approx. 450 g
AFPX-E30T Approx. 430 g
AFPX-E30TD Approx. 410 g
AFPX-E30P Approx. 430 g
AFPX-E30PD Approx. 410 g
Expansion
FP0 AFPX-EFP0 Approx. 65 g
adapter
15-4
Unit’s current consumption table
Current consumption of power supply for
Unit type Control unit
100 V AC 200 V AC 24 V DC
AFPX-C14R 185 mA or less 130 mA or less ―
AFPX-C14RD ― ― 235 mA or less
AFPX-C30R 410 mA or less 260 mA or less ―
AFPX-C30RD ― ― 360 mA or less
AFPX-C60R 540 mA or less 320 mA or less ―
AFPX-C60RD ― ― 550 mA or less
AFPX-C14T 160 mA or less 110 mA or less ―
AFPX-C14P 160 mA or less 110 mA or less ―
AFPX-C30T 360 mA or less 225 mA or less ―
Control unit
AFPX-C30P 370 mA or less 230 mA or less ―
AFPX-C60T 370 mA or less 230 mA or less ―
AFPX-C60P 380 mA or less 240 mA or less ―
AFPX-C14TD ― ― 160 mA or less
AFPX-C14PD ― ― 160 mA or less
AFPX-C30TD ― ― 200 mA or less
AFPX-C30PD ― ― 210 mA or less
AFPX-C60TD ― ― 250 mA or less
AFPX-C60PD ― ― 290 mA or less
AFPX-E16R Note1) 65 mA or less 40 mA or less 145 mA or less
AFPX-E30R Note2) 310 mA or less 210 mA or less ―
AFPX-E30RD ― ― 320 mA or less
AFPX-E16T Note1) 20 mA or less 10 mA or less 60 mA or less
AFPX-E16P Note1) 30 mA or less 15 mA or less 90 mA or less
Expansion I/O unit AFPX-E30T Note2) 345 mA or less 220 mA or less ―
AFPX-E30P Note2) 350 mA or less 225 mA or less ―
AFPX-E30TD Note2) ― ― 170 mA or less
AFPX-E30PD Note2) ― ― 220 mA or less
AFPX-E16X 20 mA or less 10 mA or less 35 mA or less
AFPX-E14YR 75 mA or less 40 mA or less 210 mA or less
AFPX-COM1 Note1)
10 mA or less 10 mA or less 10 mA or less
AFPX-COM2 Note1)
Communication AFPX-COM3 Note1)
Note1) 15 mA or less 10 mA or less 15 mA or less
cassette AFPX-COM4
AFPX-COM5 Note1) 30 mA or less 20 mA or less 75 mA or less
AFPX-COM6 Note1) 15 mA or less 10 mA or less 15 mA or less
Analog input
AFPX-AD2 Note1) 10 mA or less 10 mA or less 15 mA or less
cassette
Analog output
AFPX-DA2 Note1) 50 mA or less 30 mA or less 120 mA or less
cassette
Analog I/O Note1)
AFPX-A21 30 mA or less 20 mA or less 70 mA or less
cassette
Thermocouple
Applica- AFPX-TC2 Note1) 10 mA or less 5 mA or less 25 mA or less
cassette
tion
Input cassette AFPX-IN8 Note1) 10 mA or less 5 mA or less 10 mA or less
cassette
Note) Output cassette AFPX-TR8 Note1) 10 mA or less 5 mA or less 10 mA or less
Output cassette AFPX-TR6P Note1) 10 mA or less 5 mA or less 30 mA or less
Note1)
I/O cassette AFPX-IN4T3 10 mA or less 5 mA or less 10 mA or less
Pulse I/O Note1)
AFPX-PLS 10 mA or less 10 mA or less 15 mA or less
cassette
Master memory AFPX-MRTC
Note1) 10 mA or less 10 mA or less 10 mA or less
cassette
AIGT0032 Note1)
Programmable
AIGT0130 Note1) 25 mA or less 15 mA or less 75 mA or less
display GT01 Note) Note1)
AIGT0132
15-5
Note1) These current consumption indicate the increased amount of the current consumption of the
Control unit (refer to the example of the calculation below).
Note2) The current consumption of E30 is the current consumption at the supply terminal of E30. The
current consumption of the control unit does not increase.
Current consumption
Unit type
24 V DC
Expansion FP0 adapter AFPX-EFP0 10 mA or less
15-6
15.1.2 Performance Specifications
Descriptions
Item Relay type Transistor type
C14 C30 C60 C14 C30 C60
14 points 30 points 60 points 14 points 30 points 60 points
DC input: DC input: DC input: DC input: DC input: DC input:
Control unit 8, 16, 32, 8, 16, 32,
Ry output: Ry output: Ry output: Tr output: Tr output: Tr output:
6 14 28 6 14 28
No. of When using E16R Max. 30 Max. 46 Max. 76 Max. 30 Max. 46 Max. 76
contro- expansion I/O units points points points points points points
llable Max. 254 Max. 270 Max. 300 Max. 254 Max. 270 Max. 300
I/O When using E30R points points points points points points
points expansion I/O units (up to 8 (up to 8 (up to 8 (up to 8 (up to 8 (up to 8
units) units) units) units) units) units)
Max. 110 Max. 126 Max. 156 Max. 110 Max. 126 Max. 156
When using FP0 points points points points points points
expansion units (up to 3 (up to 3 (up to 3 (up to 3 (up to 3 (up to 3
units) units) units) units) units) units)
Programming method/Control
Relay symbol/Cyclic operation
method
Program memory Built-in Flash ROM (without backup battery)
C14 : 16k steps
Program capacity
C30/C60: 32k steps
No. of Basic 111
instruction High-level 216
Operation speed From 0.32 µs/step (by basic instruction)
Base time 0.2 ms 0.24 ms 0.3 ms 0.2 ms 0.23 ms 0.28 ms
Base time 0.17 ms (With E16: 0.34 ms x No. of units,
I/O refresh + base time With E30: 0.47 ms x No. of units, With expansion FP0 adapter: 1.4 ms + FP0
Note9)
expansion unit refresh time )
Note1)
External input (X) 1760 points (X0 to X109F)
Note1)
External output (Y) 1760 points (Y0 to Y109F)
Internal relay (R) 4096 points (R0 to R255F)
Special internal relay (R) 192 points
Relay
Note2)
1024 points (for initial setting, Timer: 1008 points (T0 to T1007), Counter: 16
Operation memory
15-7
Descriptions
Item Relay type Transistor type
C14 C30 C60 C14 C30 C60
Input 14 programs, periodical interrupt 1 Input 8 programs, periodical interrupt 1
No. of interrupt programs
program program
Avaialble Smapling by commands/Sampling at regular time intervals
For one sampling: 16 bits + 3 words
Sampling trace
C14=300 samples
C30/C60=1000 samples
All comments including I/O comments, explanatory notes, interlinear comments
Comment storage
can be stored. (Backup battery is not necessary. 328 kbytes)
Max. 16 units, link relay: 1024 points, link register: 128 words
PLC link function
(Data transmission and remote programming is not possible.)
Constant scan Available
Password Available (4 digits, 8 digits)
Upload protection Available
Self-diagnosis function Such as watchdog timer, program syntax check
Program editing during RUN Available
Single-phase 8 chs (High-speed: 4 chs,
midium-speed: 4 chs), 2-phase 4 chs
(High-speed: 2 chs, midium-speed: 2
chs)
15-8
Descriptions
Item Relay type Transistor type
C14 C30 C60 C14 C30 C60
C14: 3 chs (High-speed 2 chs, medium-
speed 1 ch)
C30/C60: 4 chs (High-speed 2 chs,
medium-speed 2 chs)
Backup by F12,
Flash Data register (32765 words)
P13 instructions
ROM Note10)
Automatic backup Counter 16 points (C1008 to C1023) , internal relay 128 points (WR248 to
backup
Note6) when power is cut WR255), data register 55 words
off (C14: DT12230 to DT12284, C30/C60: DT32710 to DT32764)
Memory that is set as hold area at system register (However, only when an
Battery backup Note7)
optional battery has been installed.)
When AFPX-
C14: 3.3 years or more (Actual usage value: 20 years (25°C))
MRTC is not
C30/C60: 2.7 years or more (Actual usage value: 20 years (25°C))
installed
Bettery
life
Note8) C14: 2.1 years or more (Actual usage value: 10 years (25°C))
When AFPX-
C30/C60: 1.8 years or more (Actual usage value: 10 years (25°C))
MRTC is
Note) More than 2 batteries can be installed. In that case, the battery life is the
installed
value multiplied by the No. of batteries.
15-9
Note1) The number of points actually available for use is determined by the hardware configuration.
Note2) The number of points can be increased by using an auxiliary timer.
Note3) This is the specifications when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC at 25 °C. The frequency will
decrease depending on voltage, temperature or usage condition.
Note4) The maximum frequency varies depending on the use.
Note5) Precision of realtime clock:
- At 0°C: less than 119 seconds per month
- At 25°C: less than 51 seconds per month
- At 55°C: less than 148 seconds per month
Note6) Writing is available up to 10000 times. When the optional battery is used, all areas can be backed
up. Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers.
Note7) If an area is held when the battery is not installed, the value of data may be indefinite as it is not
cleared to 0 when the power is turned on. When the battery ran out of the power, the data at the
hold area will be indefinite.
Note8) Note that the lifetime in actual use may be shorter than the typical lifetime depending on the use
conditions.
Note9) Refresh time of FP0 expansion unit
8-point unit No. of units used x 0.8 ms
16-point unit No. of units used x 1.0 ms
32-point unit No. of units used x 1.3 ms
64-point unit No. of units used x 1.9 ms
Note10) The contact information and the elapsed value (EV) of the counter is backed up. The setting
value (SV) is not held.
15-11
Communication specifications 1 Interface: : RS232C, RS422, RS485
Item Specifications
RS232C RS422 (isolated)
Interface Note1) RS485 (isolated) Note1) 2)
(non-isolated)
Communication mode 1:1 communicaion 1:N communication
Two-wire half-duplex
Communication method Half-duplex communication
communication
Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system
Shielded twisted-pair cable
Transmission line Multicore shielded line
or VCTF
Transmission distance 15 m Max. 1200 m Note1) Max. 1200 m Note1) 2)
Baud rate Note3)
(to be set by system register) 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
Note8)
When using a baud rate of 300 bps to 38400 bps, you can set up to a maximum of
99 units (stations) and maximum transmission distance of 1200 m.
Note3) Only 9600 bps or 19200 bps can be specified when the C-NET adapter is connected with the
RS485 interface.
Note4) The start code and end code can be used only in the general-purpose serial communication
mode.
Note5) The converter SI-35 manufactured by Lineeye Co., Ltd is recommendable for the RS485 at the
computer side. Adjust the response time for the FP-X by the SYS1 instruction if necessary.
Note6) Unit numbers should be registered by the system register.
Note7) The termination resistance of the RS485/RS422 in the COM3,COM4 and COM6 is specified by
the dip switch in the communication cassette. There is no termination resistance at the RS232C
port.
Note8) The baud rates of 300, 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS insturction only (Ver2.0 or
later).
15-12
Communication specifications 2 Interface: Ethernet
Item Specifications
IEEE802. 3u, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Interface
Connector shape: RJ45
Baud rate 100 Mpbs/10 Mbps
Transmission
Transmission method Baseband
specifications
Max. segment length 100 m Note1)
Communication cable UTP (Category 5)
Protocol TCP/IP, UDP/IP, ICMP, ARP, DHCP
Auto-negotiation function
Function
MDI/MDI-X Auto-crossover function
Note1) The length between a HUB and the module.
15-13
15.2 Table of I/O Number Allocation
15-15
15.2.4 I/O Allocation of FP-X Add-on Cassette
The FP-X add-on cassette is mounted on the FP-X control unit.
I/O numbers
I/O No.
Cassette Cassette
Type of control unit
mounting part 1 mounting part 2
Slot 0 Slot 1
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM1 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM2 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM3 − −
Communication cassette
cassette FP-X communication
AFPX-COM4 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM5 − −
cassette
FP-X communication
AFPX-COM6 − −
cassette
FP-X analog input CH0 WX10 CH0 WX20
AFPX-AD2
cassette Note2) CH1 WX11 CH1 WX21
FP-X analog output CH0 WY10 CH0 WY20
AFPX-DA2
cassette CH1 WY11 CH1 WY21
CH0 WX10 CH0 WX20
FP-X analog I/O
AFPX-A21 CH1 WX11 CH1 WX21
cassette
WY10 WY20
FP-X thermocouple CH0 WX10 CH0 WX20
AFPX-TC2
Application cassette CH1 WX11 CH1 WX21
cassette FP-X input cassette AFPX-IN8 From X100 From X200
FP-X output cassette AFPX-TR8 From Y100 From Y200
FP-X output cassette AFPX-TR6P From Y100 From Y200
From X100 From X200
FP-X I/O cassette AFPX-IN4T3
From Y100 From Y200
FP-X pulse I/O cassette From X100 From X200
Note3) AFPX-PLS
From Y100 From Y200
FP-X master memory
AFPX-MRTC − −
cassette
Note1) There is no I/O for the communication cassette and master memory cassette.
Note2) Digital conversion values are K0 to 4000. As the resolution is 12 bits, upper 4 bits are always 0.
Note3) The pulse I/O cassette cannot be used with the FP-X Tr type.
15-16
15.3 Relays, Memory Areas and Constants
Number of points and range of
memory area available for use
Item Function
C30
C14
C60
External input
Note1) 1760 points (X0 to X109F) Turns on or off based on external input.
(X)
External
1760 points (Y0 to Y109F) Externally outputs on or off state
output Note1) (Y)
Internal relay Relay which turns on or off only within
Note2) 4096 points (R0 to R255F)
(R) program.
Link relay Note2) This relay is a shared relay used for PLC
2048 points (L0 to L127F)
Relay
(L) link.
This goes on when the timer reaches the
Timer Note2) (T) specified time. It corresponds to the timer
1024 points (T0 to T1007/C1008
number.
Note2) to C1023) Note3)
Counter This goes on when the timer increments.
(C) It corresponds to the timer number.
Special
Relay which turns on or off based on
internal relay 192 points (R9000 to R911F)
specific conditions and is used as a flag.
(R)
External input Code for speciyfying 16 external input
Note1) 110 words (WX0 to WX109)
(WX) points as one word (16 bits) of data.
External
Code for specifying 16 external output
output Note1) 110 words (WY0 to WY109)
points as one word (16 bits) of data.
(WY)
Internal relay Code for specifying 16 internal relay
Note2) 256 words (WR0 to WR255)
(WR) points as one word (16 bits) of data.
Link relay Code for specifying 16 link relay points as
128 words (WL0 to WL127)
(WL) one word (16 bits) of data.
12285 words 32765 words
Data register Data memory used in program. Data is
(DT0 to (DT0 to
Memory area
Note2)
(DT) handled in 16-bit units (one word).
DT12284) DT32764)
This is a shared data memory which is
Link register
Note2) 256 words (LD0 to LD255) used within the PLC link. Data is handled
(LD)
in 16-bit units (one word).
Timer/Counter Data memory for storing a target value of
set value area 1024 words (SV0 to SV1023) a timer and setting value of a counter.
Note2)
(SV) Stores by timer/counter number
Timer/Couner Data memory for storing the elapsed
elapsed value 1024 words (EV0 to EV1023) value during operation of a timer/counter.
area Note2) (EV) Stores by timer/counter number.
Data memory for storing specific data.
Special data 374 words (DT90000 to
Various settings and error codes are
register (DT) DT90373)
stored.
Index register Register can be used as an address of
14 words (I0 to ID)
(I) memory area and constants modifier.
15-17
Number of points and range of
memory area available for use
Item Function
C30
C14
C60
Master control
relay points 256 points
(MCR) (MC)
Control instruction point
No. of labels
(JP+LOOP) 256 points
(LBL)
No. of step
1000 stages
ladders (SSTP)
No. of
subroutines 500 subroutines
(SUB)
No. of
interrupt Ry type: 14 input programs, 1 periodical program
programs Tr type: 8 input programs, 1 periodical proram
(INT)
Decimal K-32, 768 to K32, 767 (for 16-bit operation)
constants (K)
Constant
K-2, 147, 483, 648 to K2, 147, 483, 647 (for 32-bit operation)
Hexadecimal H0 to HFFFF (for 16-bit operation)
constants (H) H0 to HFFFFFFFF (for 32-bit operation)
Floating point F-1.175494 x 10-38 to F-3.402823 x 1038
type (F) F 1.175494 x 10-38 to F 3.402823 x 1038
Note1) The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory. The actual
number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration.
Note2) If no battery is used, only the fixed area is backed up. (counters 16 points: C1008 to C1023,
internal relays 128 points: R2480 (WR248) to R255F (WR255), data registers 55 words, C14:
DT12230 to DT12284, C30/C60: DT32710 to DT32764). Writing is available up to 10000 times.
Then the optional battery is used, all area can be backed up.
Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers. If an area is held
when the battery is not installed, the value of data may be indefinite as it is not cleared to 0 when
the power is turned on. When the battery ran out of the power, the data at the hold area will be
indefinite.
Note3) The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5. The
number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting.
15-18
Chapter 16
Dimensions
16.1 Dimensions
16-3
16.2 Cable/Adapter Specifications
(Unit: mm)
16-4
16.2.3 AFC8513 (PC98 PC)
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
16-5
16.2.6 AFB85813 (9-pin (male) – 25-pin (male)
(Unit: mm)
16.2.7 AFB85843 (Straight cable for connecting a modem: 9-pin (male) – 25-pin
(male)
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
16-6
16.2.9 AIP81862N (RS232 port)
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
16-7
16.2.12 AFP8550 (End-of-life (EOL) product)
(Unit: mm)
16-8
Chapter 17
Appendix
17.Appendix .......................................................................17-1
17.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / Special Data Registers... 17-3
17.1.1 Table of System Registers for FP-X.......................................................17-5
17.1.2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP-X............................................17-17
17.1.3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP-X ............................................17-28
17-2
17.1 System Registers / Special Internal Relays / Special
Data Registers
Precation for System Registers
17-3
Checking and changing the set value of system register
If you are going to use a value which is already set(the value which appears when read),
there is no need write it again.
17-4
17.1.1 Table of System Registers for FP-X
Add- Default
Item Name Description
ress value
Starting number setting for • These settings
5 1008 0 to 1024
counter are effective if the
Hold type area starting number 0 to 1024 optional backup
6 1008
setting for timer and counter battery is
Hold type area starting number installed.
7 248 0 to 256
setting for internal relays
• If no backup
Hold/ C14: 12230
Hold type area starting number battery is used, do
Non- 8 C30, C60: 0 to 32765
setting for data registers not change the
hold 1 32710
Hold or non-hold setting for step Hold/ default settings.
14 Non-hold Otherwise proper
ladder process Non-hold
functioning of
Previous value is held for a hold/non-hold
Hold/
4 leading edge detection instruction Hold
Non-hold values cannot be
(DF instruction) with MC
guaranteed.
Hold type area starting number for
10 64 0 to 64
PC(PLC) W0-0 link relays
Hold type area starting number for
Hold/ 11 128 64 to 128
PC(PLC) W0-1 link relays
Non-
Hold type area starting number for
hold 2 12 128 0 to 128
PC(PLC) W0-0 link registers
Hold type area starting number for
13 256 128 to 256
PC(PLC) W0-1 link registers
Disable or enable setting for
20 Disabled Disabled/Enabled
duplicated output
Operation setting when an I/O
23 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
verification error occurs
Operation setting when an
26 Stop Stop/Continuation of operation
operation error occurs
Dis- When a battery error
Action
abled: occurs, a self-diagnostic
on
error is not issued and
error
the ERROR/ALARM
Alarm battery error
LED does not flash.
4 (Operating setting when Disabled
Ena- When a battery error
battery error occurs)
bled: occurs, a self-diagnostic
error is issued and the
ERROR/ALARM LED
flashes.
Wait time setting for multi-frame
31 6500.0 ms 10 to 81900 ms
communication
Timeout setting for SEND/RECV,
32 10000.0 ms 10 to 81900 ms
RMRD/RMWT commands
Time
0: Normal scan
set- Constant value settings for scan Normal
34 0 to 350 ms: Scans once each
ting time scan
specified time interval
0
36 Expansion unit recognition time (No wait 0 to 10 s (0.1 second bit)
time)
17-5
FP-X
Add- Default
Item Name Description
ress value
Range of link relays used for
40 0 0 to 64 words
PC(PLC) link
Range of link data registers used for
41 0 0 to 128 words
PC(PLC) link
PC
Starting number for link relay
(PLC) 42 0 0 to 63
transmission
link
43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
W0-0
Starting number for link data register
set- 44 0 0 to 127
transmission
ting
45 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 127 words
46 PC(PLC) link switch flag Normal Normal/reverse
Maximum unit number setting for
47 16 1 to 16
MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link
Range of link relays used for
50 0 0 to 64 words
PC(PLC) link
Range of link data registers used for
51 0 0 to 128 words
PC PC(PLC) link
(PLC) Starting number for link relay
52 64 64 to 127
link transmission
W0-1 53 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words
set- Starting number for link data register
54 128 128 to 255
ting transmission
55 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 127 words
Maximum unit number setting for
57 16 1 to 16
MEWNET-W0 PC(PLC) link
17-6
FP-X Tr type
Add-
Item Name Default value Description
ress
Do not set input X0 as high-speed counter.
Incremental input (X0)
CH0: Decremental input (X0)
Do not set input X0 as Two-phase input (X0, X1)
high-speed counter Individual input (X0, X1)
Incremental/decremental control input (X0,
X1)
Cont- CH1: Do not set input X1 as high-speed counter.
High-
roller Do not set input X1 as Incremental input (X1)
speed Decremental input (X1)
input high-speed counter
400 counter
settings Do not set input X2 as high-speed counter.
1 settings Incremental input (X2)
(HSC) (X0 to X3) CH2: Decremental input (X2)
Do not set input X2 as Two-phase input (X2, X3)
high-speed counter Individual input (X2, X3)
Incremental/decremental control input (X2,
X3)
CH3: Do not set input X3 as high-speed counter.
Do not set input X3 as Incremental input (X3)
high-speed counter Decremental input (X3)
Do not set input X4 as high-speed counter.
Incremental input (X4)
CH4: Decremental input (X4)
Do not set input X4 as Two-phase input (X4, X5)
high-speed counter Individual input (X4, X5)
Incremental/decremental control input (X4,
X5)
X4: Normal input
Normal input Home input of pulse output CH0
CH5: Do not set input X5 as high-speed counter.
Do not set input X5 as Incremental input (X5)
High- high-speed counter Decremental input (X5)
Cont-
roller speed X5: Normal input
input counter/ Normal input Home input of pulse output CH1
settings 401 pulse Do not set input X6 as high-speed counter.
2 output Incremental input (X6)
(HSC/ CH6: Decremental input (X6)
settings
PLS) Do not set input X6 as Two-phase input (X6, X7)
(X4 to X7) Individual input (X6, X7)
high-speed counter
Incremental/decremental control input (X6,
X7)
Normal input
X6:
Home input of pulse output CH2
Normal input Reset input of high-speed counter CH0
CH7: Do not set input X7 as high-speed counter.
Do not set input X7 as Incremental input (X7)
high-speed counter Decremental input (X7)
Normal input
X7:
Home input of pulse output CH3
Normal input Reset input of high-speed counter CH2
17-7
FP-X Tr type
Add-
Item Name Default value Description
ress
Normal output (Y0, Y1)
CH0:
Pulse output (Y0, Y1)
Normal output PWM output (Y0), Normal output (Y1)
Cont- Normal output (Y2, Y3)
roller Pulse/ CH1:
Pulse output (Y2, Y3)
output PWM output Normal output PWM output (Y2), Normal output (Y3)
402
settings settings Normal output (Y4, Y5)
CH2:
(PLS/ (Y0 to Y7) Pulse output (Y4, Y5)
Normal output PWM output (Y4), Normal output (Y5)
PWM)
Normal output (Y6, Y7)
CH3:
Pulse output (Y6, Y7)
Normal output PWM output (Y6), Normal output (Y7)
Pulse catch
403 input Not set
Inter- The pressed contact is set for the pulse catch
rupt/ settings
input.
Pulse
catch Interrupt
settings 404 input Not set
The pressed contact is set for the interrupt
settings
input.
Inter- Interrupt
rupt edge setting
405 Leading edge
edge for controller
settings input The pressed contact is up and set to trailing
edge.
Note1) If CH0, CH2, CH4 and CH6 of the high-speed counter is set to the two-phase input, individual
input or incremental/decremental control input, the settings of CH1, CH3, CH and CH7 will be
invalid.
Note2) Only CH0 and CH2 are available for the reset input of the high-speed counter.
X6 for CH0 and X7 for CH2 can be allocated.
Note3) X4 to X7 can be used as the home input of the pulse output CH0 to CH3.
When using the home return function of the pulse output, always set the home input. In that
case, X4 to X7 cannot be set as the high-speed counter.
Note4) When using the pulse output/PWM output, the controller output settings must be specified.
The output that has been set to the pulse output/PWM output cannot be used as the normal
output.
Note5) If the same input has been set to the high-speed, pulse catch and interrupt input simultaneously,
the following precedence order is effective:
[High-speed counter] → [Pulse catch] → [Interrupt input]
17-8
FP-X Ry type
Add-
Item Name Default value Description
ress
Do not set input X100 as high-speed counter.
Two-phase input (X100, X101)
Two-phase input (X100, X101), Reset input
(X102)
Incremental input (X100)
CH8: Incremental input (X100), Reset input (X102)
Do not set Decremental input (X100)
input X100 as Decremental input (X100), Reset input (X102)
High-speed high-speed Incremental/decremental input (X100, X101)
Incremental/decremental input (X100, X101),
counter counter
Reset input (X102)
settings Incremental/decremental control input (X100,
400 (X100 to X102) X101)
Incremental/decremental control input (X100,
X101), Reset input (X102)
CH9: Do not set input X101 as high-speed counter.
Do not set Incremental input (X101)
input X101 as Incremental input (X101), Reset input (X102)
high-speed Decremental input (X101)
Decremental input (X101), Reset input (X102)
counter
Pulse output CH0: Normal output (Y100, Y101)
Pulse I/O settings Normal Pulse output (Y100, Y101)
cassette PWM output (Y100), Normal output (Y101)
(Y100 to Y101) output
settings
Do not set input X200 as high-speed counter.
(HSC/ Two-phase input (X200, X201)
PLS) Two-phase
input (X200, X201), Reset input (X202)
Incremental input (X200)
CHA: Incremental input (X200), Reset input (X202)
Do not set Decremental input (X202)
input X200 as Decremental input (X202), Reset input (X202)
High-speed high-speed Incremental/decremental input (X200, X201)
Incremental/decremental input (X200, X201),
counter counter
Reset input (X202)
settings Incremental/decremental control
401 (X200 to X202) (X200, X201)
Incremental/decremental control
(X200, X201), Reset input (X202)
CHB: Does not set input X201 as high-speed
Do not set counter.
Incremental input (X201)
input X201 as Incremental input (X201), Reset input (X202)
high-speed Decremental input (X201)
counter Decremental input (X201), Reset input (X202)
Pulse output CH1: Normal output (Y200, Y201)
settings Normal Pulse output (Y200, Y201)
(Y200 to Y201) output PWM output (Y200), Normal output (Y201)
17-9
Note1) If the operation mode is set to Two-phase, incremental/decremental, or incremental/decremental
control, the setting for CH9 is invalid in system register 400 and the setting for CHB is invalid in
system register 401.
Note2) If reset input settings overlap, the CH9 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the
CHB setting takes precedence in system register 401.
Note3) CHA, CHB and CH1 input signals in system register 401 are the signals when the pulse I/O
cassette (AFPX-PLS) is installed in the cassette mounting part 2.
Note4) If the operation mode setting for the pulse output CH0 and CH1 is carried out, it cannot be used
as normal output.
When the operation mode for the pulse output CH0 is set to 1, the reset input setting for the
high-speed counter CH8 and CH9 is invalid.
When the operation mode for the pulse output CH1 is set to 1, the reset input setting for the
high-speed counter CHA and CHB is invalid.
Note5) Upgrade FPWIN GR to Ver2.6 or higher version if the No. of I/O allocation is indicated with 1-digit
number such as X0 in the setting window No. 400 and 401 of FPWIN GR.
17-10
FP-X Ry type
Add-
Item Name Default value Description
ress
CH0: Do not set input X0 as high-speed counter.
Incremental input (X0)
Do not set input X0 as Decremental input (X0)
high-speed counter Two-phase input (X0, X1)
CH1: Do not set input X1 as high-speed counter.
Incremental input (X1)
Do not set input X1 as Decremental input (X1)
high-speed counter Two-phase input (X0, X1)
CH2: Do not set input X2 as high-speed counter.
Incremental input (X2)
Do not set input X2 as Decremental input (X2)
high-speed counter Two-phase input (X2, X3)
CH3: Do not set input X3 as high-speed counter.
Cont- High- Incremental input (X3)
Do not set input X3 as Decremental input (X3)
roller speed high-speed counter Two-phase input (X2, X3)
input 402 counter
CH4: Do not set input X4 as high-speed counter.
settings settings Incremental input (X4)
(HSC) (X0 to X7) Do not set input X4 as Decremental input (X4)
high-speed counter Two-phase input (X3 X4)
CH5: Do not set input X5 as high-speed counter.
Incremental input (X5)
Do not set input X5 as Decremental input (X5)
high-speed counter Two-phase input (X4, X5)
CH6: Do not set input X6 as high-speed counter.
Incremental input (X6)
Do not set input X6 as Decremental input (X6)
high-speed counter Two-phase input (X5, X6)
CH7: Do not set input X7 as high-speed counter.
Incremental input (X7)
Do not set input X7 as Decremental input (X7)
high-speed counter Two-phase input (X6, X7)
Pulse
catch
403 Not set
Inter- input The pressed contact is set for the pulse
rupt/ settings catch input.
pulse
catch
Interrupt
settings
404 input Not set
settings The pressed contact is set for the interrupt
input.
17-11
FP-X Ry type
Add-
Item Name Default value Description
ress
Interrupt
edge setting
405 for Leading edge
controller
Inter- input The pressed contact is up and set to trailing
rupt edge.
edge
settings Interrupt
edge setting
406 Leading edge
for pulse I/O
cassette The pressed contact is up and set to trailing
edge.
Note1) For counting two-phase input, only CH0, CH2, CH4 and CH6 can be used.
When two-phase input is specified for CH0, CH2, CH4 and CH6, the settings for CH1, CH3,
CH5 and CH7 corresponding to each CH No. are ignored, however, specify the same setting for
those channels.
Note2) The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 403 and
404.
Note3) If system register 400 to 404 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay, the following
precedence order is effective: [High-speed counter]→[Pulse catch]→[Interrupt input].
<Example>
When the high-speed counter is being used in the addition input mode, even if input X0 is
specified as an interrupt input or as pulse catch input, those settings are invalid, and X0
functions as counter input for the high-speed counter.
Note4) Upgrade FPWIN GR to Ver2.6 or higher version if the No. of I/O allocation is indicated with 1-digit
number such as X0 in the setting window No. 403,404 and 406 of FPWIN GR.
17-12
FP-X
Add- Default
Item Name Description
ress value
410 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99
Communication Computer link
Computer link
mode setting General-purpose communications
412
Selection of modem
Disabled Enabled/Disabled
connection
Enter the settings for the various items.
- Data length bit: 7 bits/8 bits
- Parity check: none/with odd/with even
Data length
- Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
bit: 8 bits
Communication - The following setting is valid only when
413 Parity check:
format setting the communication mode specified by
“with odd”
system register 412 has been set to
Stop bit: 1 bit
“General-purpose serial communication”.
- Terminator: CR/CR+LF/None
Tool
- Header: STX not exist/STX exist
port
set- 2400 bps
ting 4800 bps
9600 bps
415 Baud rate setting 9600 bps 19200 bps
38400 bps
57600 bps
115200 bps
Starting address for
received buffer of
420 0 0 to 32764
general (serial data)
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
421 received of general 2048 0 to 2048
(serial data)
communication mode
17-13
FP-X
Add- Default
Item Name Description
ress value
410 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99
Computer link
Communication General-purpose serial communication
Computer link
mode setting PC(PLC) link
412
MODBUS RTU
Selection of modem
Disabled Enabled/Disabled
connection
Enter the settings for the various items.
- Data length bit: 7 bits/8 bits
- Parity check: none/with odd/with even
Data length
- Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
bit: 8 bits
Communication - The following setting is valid only when
413 Parity check:
format setting the communication mode specified by
Odd
system register 412 has been set to
Stop bit: 1 bit
COM. “General-purpose serial communication”.
1 - Terminator: CR/CR+LF/None
port - Header: STX not exist/STX exist
set- 2400 bps
ting 4800 bps
9600 bps
415 Baud rate setting 9600 bps 19200 bps
38400 bps
57600 bps
115200 bps
Starting address for
received buffer of
416 0 0 to 32764
general (serial data)
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
417 received of general 2048 0 to 2048
(serial data)
communication mode
Note1) The communication format in a PC(PLC) link is fixed at the following settings:
Data length is 8 bits, odd parity, stop bit is 1.
The communication speed (baud rate) is fixed at 115200 bps.
Note2) Reference: For information on MODBUS RTU mode operation, <MODBUS RUT
Specifications>.
17-14
FP-X
Add- Default
Item Name Description
ress value
411 Unit No. setting 1 1 to 99
Computer link
Communication mode Computer
General-purpose serial communication
setting link
MODBUS RTU
412 Selection of modem
Disabled Enabled/Disabled
connection
Built-in USB
Selection of port Built-in USB
Communication cassette
Enter the settings for the various items.
- Data length bit: 7 bits/8 bits
- Parity check: none/odd/even
Data length
- Stop bit: 1 bit/2 bits
bit: 8 bits
Communication - The following setting is valid only when
414 Parity check:
format setting the communication mode specified by
“with odd”
system register 412 has been set to
Stop bit: 1 bit
COM. “General-purpose serial communication”.
2 port - Terminator: CR/CR+LF/None
set- - Header: STX not exist/STX exist
ting 2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
415 Baud rate setting 9600 bps 19200 bps
38400 bps
57600 bps
115200 bps
Starting address for
received buffer of
416 2048 0 to 32764
general (serial data)
communication mode
Buffer capacity
setting for data
417 received of general 2048 0 to 2048
(serial data)
communication mode
Note1) The communication format in a PC(PLC) link is fixed at the following settings:
the data length is 8 bits, odd parity, stop bit is 1.
The communication speed (baud rate) is fixed at 115200 bps.
Note2) The USB port for C30 and C60 can be selected by the system register setting.
The USB port has been selected for the COM2 port of C30 and C60 as default setting. The USB
port is 115.2 kbps despite of the baud rate setting No. 415.
The setting for No. 412 must be changed to communication cassette for using the COM2 port of
the communication cassette.
The COM2 port of the USB port and the communication cassette cannot be used at the same time.
17-15
FP-X
Add- Default
Item Name Description
ress value
Controller input time
430 constant setting 1
X0 to X3
Controller input time
431 constant setting 1
X4 to X7
Controller input time
432 constant setting 2 None
Cont-
X8 to XB 1 ms
roller
Controller input time 2 ms
input
433 constant setting 2 4 ms
time
XC to XF
cons- None 8 ms
Controller input time
tant 16 ms
434 constant setting 3
set- 32 ms
X10 to X13
tings
(Note1) Controller input time 128 ms
435 constant setting 3 156 ms
X14 to X17
Controller input time
436 constant setting 4
X18 to X1B
Controller input time
437 constant setting 4
X1C to X1F
Note1) These settings are available for the FP-X V2.0 or later.
17-16
17.1.2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP-X
The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions. The on and off states are not output
externally. Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction.
WR900 FP-X
Address Name Description
Self-diagnostic error Turns on when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
R9000
flag ⇒ The content of self-diagnostic error is stored in DT90000.
R9001 Not used -
Application cassette Turns on when an error is detected in the I/O type application
R9002
I/O error flag cassette.
Application cassette
R9003 Turns on when an error is detected in the application cassette.
abnormal error flag
I/O verification error
R9004 Turns on when an I/O verification error occurs.
flag
Turns on when a backup battery error occurs.
Backup battery error
R9005 Turns on when the battery has run out even if the system
flag (non-hold)
register No. 4 has been set not to inform the battery error.
Turns on when a backup battery error occurs.
Turns on when the battery has run out even if the system
register No. 4 has been set not to inform the battery error.
Backup battery error
R9006 Once a battery error has been detected, this is held even after
flag (hold)
recovery has been made.
⇒It goes off if the power supply is turned off, or if the system
is initialized.
Turns on and keeps the on state when an operation error
Operation error flag occurs.
R9007
(hold) ⇒The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017.
(indicates the first operation error which occurred).
Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs.
Operation error flag
R9008 ⇒The address where the operation error occurred is stored in
(non-hold)
DT90018. The contents change each time a new error occurs.
This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation
R9009 Carry flag results, and as a result of a shift system instruction being
executed.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become
R900A > Flag
larger in the comparison instructions.
Turns on for an instant,
- when the compared results are equal in the comparison
R900B = Flag instructions.
- when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic
instructions.
Turns on for an instant when the compared results become
R900C < Flag
smaller in the comparison instructions.
Turns on when the set time elapses (set value reaches 0) in
Auxiliary timer the timing operation of the F137(STMR)/F183(DSTM)
R900D
Contact auxiliary timer instruction. The flag turns off when the trigger
for auxiliary timer instruction turns off.
Tool port
R900E Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred.
communication error
Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in
Constant scan error
R900F system register 34 during constant scan execution.
flag
This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34.
17-17
WR901 FP-X
Address Name Description
R9010 Always on relay Always on.
R9011 Always off relay Always off.
R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan.
Goes on for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has
Initial (on type) pulse
R9013 been started, and goes off for the second and subsequent
relay
scans.
Goes off for only the first scan after operation (RUN) has
Initial (off type) pulse
R9014 been started, and goes on for the second and subsequent
relay
scans.
Step ladder initial pulse Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at
R9015
relay (on type) the step ladder control.
R9016 Not used -
R9017 Not used -
Repeats on/off operations in 0.01
R9018 0.01 s clock pulse relay
sec. cycles.
17-18
WR902 FP-X
Address Name Description
Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG.
R9020 RUN mode flag
Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN.
R9021 Not used -
R9022 Not used -
R9023 Not used -
R9024 Not used -
R9025 Not used -
R9026 Message flag Turns on while the F149 (MSG) instruction is executed.
R9027 Not used -
R9028 Not used -
Turns on during forced on/off operation for input/output
R9029 Forcing flag
relay timer/counter contacts.
Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by
R902A Interrupt enable flag
the ICTL instruction.
R902B Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs.
Sampling by the instruction=0
R902C Sample point flag
Sampling at constant time intervals=1
When the sampling operation stops=1,
R902D Sample trace end flag
When the sampling operation starts=0
Sampling stop trigger When the sampling stop trigger activates=1
R902E
flag When the sampling stop trigger stops=0
When sampling starts=1
R902F Sampling enable flag
When sampling stops=0
17-19
WR903 FP-X
Address Name Description
R9030 Not used -
R9031 Not used -
- Turns on when the general-purpose communication
function is being used
R9032 COM1 port mode flag
- Goes off when any function other than the general-
purpose communication function is being used.
Off: Printing is not executed.
R9033 PR instruction flag
On: Execution is in progress.
Editing in RUN mode Goes on for ony the first scan following completion of a
R9034
flag rewrite during the RUN operation.
R9035 Not used -
R9036 Not used -
- Goes on if a transmission error occurs during data
COM1 port
communication.
R9037 communication error
- Goes off when a request is made to send data, using the
flag
F159 (MTRN) instruction.
COM1 port reception
done flag during - Turns on when the terminator is received during general -
R9038
general- purpose serial purpose serial communication.
communication
COM1 port transmission - Goes on when transmission has been completed in
done flag during general-purpose serial communication.
R9039
general-purpose serial - Goes off when transmission is requested in general-
communication purpose serial communication.
R903A Not used -
R903B Not used -
R903C Not used -
R903D Not used -
TOOL port reception
- Turns on when the terminator is received during general -
R903E done flag during general
purpose serial communication.
purpose communication
TOOL port transmission - Goes on when transmission has been completed in
done flag during general-purpose serial communication.
R903F
general-purpose serial - Goes off when transmission is requested in general-
communication purpose serial communication.
Note) R9030 to R903F can be changed during 1 scan.
17-20
WR904 FP-X
Address Name Description
- Goes on when the general-purpose serial
R9040 TOOL port mode flag communication is used.
- Goes off when the MEWTOCOL is used.
R9041 COM1 port PC(PLC) link flag Turn on while the PC(PLC) link function is used.
- Goes on when the general-purpose serial
R9042 COM2 port mode flag communication is used.
- Goes off when the MEWTOCOL is used.
R9043 Not used -
Monitors whether the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV)
instructions can be executed or not for the COM1 port.
COM1 port SEND/RECV Off: None of the above mentioned instructions can be
R9044
instruction execution flag executed. (During executing the instruction)
On: One of the above mentioned instructions can be
executed.
Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the
execution of the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV)
COM1 port SEND/RECV
instructions for the COM1 port as follows:
R9045 instruction execution end
Off: No abonormality detected.
flag
On: An abnormality detected. (communication error)
The error code is stored in DT90124.
R9046 Not used -
- Goes on if a transmission error occurs during data
COM2 port communication communication.
R9047
error flag - Goes off when a request is made to send data,
using the F159 (MTRN) instruction.
COM2 port
reception done flag during - Turn on when the terminator is received during
R9048
general-purpose general-purpose serial communication.
communicating
COM2 port - Goes on when transmission has been completed in
transmission done flag general-purpose serial communication.
R9049
during general-purpose - Goes off when transmission is requested in general-
communication purpose communication.
Monitors whether the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV)
instructions can be executed or not for the COM2 port.
COM2 port SEND/RECV Off: None of the above mentioned instructions can be
R904A
instruction execution flag executed. (During executing the instruction)
On: One of the above mentioned instructions can be
executed.
Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the
execution of the F145 (SEND) or F146 (RECV)
COM2 port SEND/RECV
instructions for the COM2 port as follows:
R904B instruction execution end
Off: No abonormality detected.
flag
On: An abnormality detected. (communication error)
The error code is stored in DT90125.
R904C to
Not used -
R904F
Note) R9040 to R904F can be changed during 1 scan.
17-21
WR905 FP-X
Address Name Description
When using MEWNET-W0
MEWNET-W0 - Turns on when a transmission error occurs at
R9050 PC(PLC) link PC(PLC) link.
transmission error flag - Turns on when there is an error in the PC(PLC) link area
settings.
R9051 to
Not used
R905F
17-22
WR906 FP-X
Address Name Description
Turns on when Unit No. 1 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9060 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.1
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 2 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9061 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.2
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 3 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9062 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.3
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 4 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9063 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.4
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 5 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9064 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.5
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 6 is communicating properly in PLC
Unit
R9065 link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
No.6
occurs, or when not in the PLC link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 7 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9066 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.7
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 8 is communicating properly in
MEWNET-W0 Unit
R9067 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
PC(PLC) link 0 No.8
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
transmission
Turns on when Unit No. 9 is communicating properly in
assurance Unit
R9068 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
relay No.9
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 10 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9069 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.10
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 11 is communicating properly in
Unit
R906A PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.11
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 12 is communicating properly in
Unit
R906B PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.12
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 13 is communicating properly in
Unit
R906C PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.13
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 14 is communicating properly in
Unit
R906D PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.14
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 15 is communicating properly in
Unit
R906E PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.15
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 16 is communicating properly in
Unit
R906F PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.16
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
17-23
WR907 FP-X
Address Name Description
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is in the RUN mode.
R9070
No.1 Turns off when Unit No. 1 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 2 is in the RUN mode.
R9071
No.2 Turns off when Unit No. 2 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 3 is in the RUN mode.
R9072
No.3 Turns off when Unit No. 3 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 4 is in the RUN mode.
R9073
No.4 Turns off when Unit No. 4 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 5 is in the RUN mode.
R9074
No.5 Turns off when Unit No. 5 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 6 is in the RUN mode.
R9075
No.6 Turns off when Unit No. 6 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 7 is in the RUN mode.
R9076
No.7 Turns off when Unit No. 7 is in the PROG. mode.
MEWNET-W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is in the RUN mode.
R9077
PC(PLC) link No.8 Turns off when Unit No. 8 is in the PROG. mode.
0 operation Unit Turns on when Unit No. 9 is in the RUN mode.
R9078
mode relay No.9 Turns off when Unit No. 9 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 10 is in the RUN mode.
R9079
No.10 Turns off when Unit No. 10 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 11 is in the RUN mode.
R907A
No.11 Turns off when Unit No. 11 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 12 is in the RUN mode.
R907B
No.12 Turns off when Unit No. 12 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 13 is in the RUN mode.
R907C
No.13 Turns off when Unit No. 13 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 14 is in the RUN mode.
R907D
No.14 Turns off when Unit No. 14 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 15 is in the RUN mode.
R907E
No.15 Turns off when Unit No. 15 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 16 is in the RUN mode.
R907F
No.16 Turns off when Unit No. 16 is in the PROG. mode.
17-24
WR908 FP-X
Address Name Description
Turns on when Unit No. 1 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9080 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.1
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 2 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9081 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.2
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 3 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9082 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.3
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 4 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9083 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.4
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 5 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9084 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.5
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 6 is communicating properly in PLC
Unit
R9085 link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped, when an error
No.6
occurs, or when not in the PLC link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 7 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9086 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.7
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 8 is communicating properly in
MEWNET-W0 Unit
R9087 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
PC(PLC) link 1 No.8
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
transmission
Turns on when Unit No. 9 is communicating properly in
assurance Unit
R9088 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
relay No.9
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 10 is communicating properly in
Unit
R9089 PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.10
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 11 is communicating properly in
Unit
R908A PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.11
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 12 is communicating properly in
Unit
R908B PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.12
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 13 is communicating properly in
Unit
R908C PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.13
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 14 is communicating properly in
Unit
R908D PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.14
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 15 is communicating properly in
Unit
R908E PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.15
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
Turns on when Unit No. 16 is communicating properly in
Unit
R908F PC(PLC) link mode. Turns off when operation is stopped,
No.16
when an error occurs, or when not in the PC(PLC) link mode.
17-25
WR909 FP-X
Address Name Description
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 1 is in the RUN mode.
R9090
No.1 Turns off when Unit No. 1 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 2 is in the RUN mode.
R9091
No.2 Turns off when Unit No. 2 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 3 is in the RUN mode.
R9092
No.3 Turns off when Unit No. 3 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 4 is in the RUN mode.
R9093
No.4 Turns off when Unit No. 4 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 5 is in the RUN mode.
R9094
No.5 Turns off when Unit No. 5 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 6 is in the RUN mode.
R9095
No.6 Turns off when Unit No. 6 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 7 is in the RUN mode.
R9096
No.7 Turns off when Unit No. 7 is in the PROG. mode.
MEWNET-W0 Unit Turns on when Unit No. 8 is in the RUN mode.
R9097
PC(PLC) link No.8 Turns off when Unit No. 8 is in the PROG. mode.
1 operation Unit Turns on when Unit No. 9 is in the RUN mode.
R9098
mode relay No.9 Turns off when Unit No. 9 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 10 is in the RUN mode.
R9099
No.10 Turns off when Unit No. 10 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 11 is in the RUN mode.
R909A
No.11 Turns off when Unit No. 11 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 12 is in the RUN mode.
R909B
No.12 Turns off when Unit No. 12 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 13 is in the RUN mode.
R909C
No.13 Turns off when Unit No. 13 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 14 is in the RUN mode.
R909D
No.14 Turns off when Unit No. 14 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 15 is in the RUN mode.
R909E
No.15 Turns off when Unit No. 15 is in the PROG. mode.
Unit Turns on when Unit No. 16 is in the RUN mode.
R909F
No.16 Turns off when Unit No. 16 is in the PROG. mode.
17-26
WR910 FP-X
Address Name Description
R9100 to
Not used -
R910F
R9110 HSC-CH0
R9111 HSC-CH1
R9112 HSC-CH2
R9113 HSC-CH3
- Turns on while the F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R)
R9114 HSC-CH4
instructions are executed.
R9115 HSC-CH5
- Turns off when the F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R)
R9116 HSC-CH6
instructions are completed.
R9117 Control HSC-CH7
R9118 flag HSC-CH8 Note1)
R9119 HSC-CH9 Note1)
R911A HSC-CHA Note1)
R911B HSC-CHB Note1)
R911C PLS-CH0
- Turns on while the pulses are being output by the F171
R911D PLS-CH1
Note2) (SPDH), F172 (PLSH), F173 (PWMH) and F174 (SP0H)
R911E PLS-CH2
Note2) instructions.
R911F PLS-CH3
Note1) This relay is avaialble for the FP-X Ry type only.
Note2) This relay is available for the FP-X Tr type only.
17-27
17.1.3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP-X
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read Writ-
Address Name Description
-ing ing
Self-diagnostic error The self-diagnostic error code is stored here
DT90000 A N/A
code when a self-diagnostic error occurs.
DT90001 Not used - N/A N/A
When an error occurs at the I/O board for the
application cassette, the bit corresponding to
Position of abnormal the board will be set on.
DT90002 I/O board for A N/A
application cassette
17-28
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read Writ-
Address Name Description
-ing ing
When the state of installation of an FP-X add-
on cassette has changed since the power was
turned on, the bit corresponding to the unit No.
Add-on cassette will turn on. Monitor using binary display.
DT90011 A N/A
verify error unit
17-29
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read Writ-
Address Name Description
-ing ing
The current scan time is stored here. Scan
time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (current
DT90022 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The minimum scan time is stored here. Scan
time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (minimum
DT90023 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K50 indicates 5 ms.
The maximum scan time is stored here. The
scan time is calculated using the formula:
Scan time (maximum
DT90024 Note) Scan time (ms) = stored data (decimal) x 0.1 A N/A
value)
ms
Example: K125 indicates 12.5 ms.
The mask conditions of interrupts using the
instruction can be stored here. Monitor using
Mask condition
binary display.
monitoring register
DT90025 A N/A
for interrupts
(INT0 to 13)
17-30
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
The number of data that match the searched
Work1 for SRC
DT90037 data is stored here when F96 (SRC) A N/A
instructions
insturction is executed.
The position of the first matching data is
Work2 for SRC
DT90038 stored here when an F96 (SRC) instruction is A N/A
instructions
executed.
DT90039 Not used - N/A N/A
The potentiometer value (K0 to K1000) is
DT90040 Volume input 0 stored here. This value can be used in analog
timers and other applications by using the
A N/A
program to read this value to a data register.
DT90041 Volume input 1 V0→DT90040
V1→DT90041
For C60 only:
DT90042 Volume input 2 The potentiometer value (K0 to K1000) is
stored here. This value can be used in analog
timers and other applications by using the A N/A
program to read this value to a data register.
DT90043 Volume input 3 V2→DT90042
V3→DT90043
17-31
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read Writ-
Address Name Description
-ing ing
A value can be written with F0 (MV) instruction
to reset the high-speed counter, disable
counting, continue or clear high-speed counter
instruction.
High-speed counter
DT90052 N/A A
control flag
17-32
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read Writ-
Address Name Description
-ing ing
A value can be written with F0 (MV) instruction
to reset the high-speed counter, disable
counting, continue or clear high-speed counter
instruction.
17-33
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read Writ-
Address Name Description
-ing ing
Hour and minute data of the clock/calendar
are stored here. This data is read-only data. It
cannot be overwritten.
Clock/calendar
DT90053 A N/A
monitor (hour/minute)
Clock/calendar setting A A
DT90056
(year/month)
Clock/calendar setting
DT90057
(day-of-the-week)
As a day of the week is not automatially set on
FPWIN GR, fix what day is set to 00, and set
each value for 00 to 06.
17-34
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
The clock calendar is adjusted as follows.
When setting the clock/calendar by
program
By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1, the
time becomes that written to DT90054 to
DT90057 by F0 (MV) instruction. After the
time is set, DT90058 is cleared to 0. (Cannot
be performed with any instruction other than
F0 (MV) instruction.)
<Example>
Set the time to 12:00:00 on the 5th day when
the X0 turns on.
Example:
Correct to 0 seconds with X0: on
17-35
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90060
(0 to 15)
Step ladder process
DT90061
(16 to 31)
Step ladder process
DT90062
(32 to 47)
Step ladder process
DT90063
(48 to 63)
Step ladder process
DT90064
(64 to 79)
Step ladder process
DT90065
(80 to 95)
Step ladder process
DT90066
(96 to 111)
Step ladder process
DT90067
(112 to 127) Indicates the startup condition of the step
Step ladder process ladder process. When the process starts up,
DT90068
(128 to 143) the bit corresponding to the process number
Step ladder process turns on.
DT90069
(144 to 159)
Step ladder process Monitor using binary display.
DT90070
(160 to 175)
A A
Step ladder process
DT90071
(176 to 191)
Step ladder process
DT90072
(192 to 207)
Step ladder process
DT90073 A programming tool software can be used to
(208 to 223)
Step ladder process write data.
DT90074
(224 to 239)
Step ladder process
DT90075
(240 to 255)
Step ladder process
DT90076
(256 to 271)
Step ladder process
DT90077
(272 to 287)
Step ladder process
DT90078
(288 to 303)
Step ladder process
DT90079
(304 to 319)
Step ladder process
DT90080
(320 to 335)
Step ladder process
DT90081
(336 to 351)
17-36
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90082
(352 to 367)
Step ladder process
DT90083
(368 to 383)
Step ladder process
DT90084
(384 to 399)
Step ladder process
DT90085
(400 to 415)
Step ladder process
DT90086
(416 to 431) Indicates the startup condition of the step
Step ladder process ladder process. When the process starts up,
DT90087
(432 to 447) the bit corresponding to the process number
Step ladder process turns on .
DT90088
(448 to 463)
Step ladder process Monitor using binary display.
DT90089
(464 to 479)
A A
Step ladder process
DT90090
(480 to 495)
Step ladder process
DT90091
(496 to 511)
Step ladder process
DT90092 A programming tool software can be used to
(512 to 527)
Step ladder process write data.
DT90093
(528 to 543)
Step ladder process
DT90094
(544 to 559)
Step ladder process
DT90095
(560 to 575)
Step ladder process
DT90096
(576 to 591)
Step ladder process
DT90097
(592 to 607)
17-37
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Step ladder process
DT90098
(608 to 623)
Step ladder process
DT90099
(624 to 639)
Step ladder process
DT90100
(640 to 655)
Step ladder process
DT90101
(656 to 671)
Step ladder process
DT90102
(672 to 687)
Step ladder process
DT90103
(688 to 703)
Step ladder process
DT90104
(704 to 719)
Step ladder process
DT90105
(720 to 735)
Step ladder process
DT90106
(736 to 751)
Step ladder process Indicates the startup condition of the step
DT90107
(752 to 767) ladder process. When the process starts up,
Step ladder process the bit corresponding to the process number
DT90108
(768 to 783)
turns on.
Step ladder process
DT90109
(784 to 799)
Step ladder process Monitor using binary display
DT90110
(800 to 815)
A A
Step ladder process
DT90111
(816 to 831)
Step ladder process
DT90112
(832 to 847)
Step ladder process
DT90113
(848 to 863)
Step ladder process A programming tool software can be used to
DT90114
(864 to 879) write data.
Step ladder process
DT90115
(880 to 895)
Step ladder process
DT90116
(896 to 911)
Step ladder process
DT90117
(912 to 927)
Step ladder process
DT90118
(928 to 943)
Step ladder process
DT90119
(944 to 959)
Step ladder process
DT90120
(960 to 975)
Step ladder process
DT90121
(976 to 991)
Step ladder process
DT90122 (992 to 999)
(higher byte is not used.)
17-38
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read Writ
Address Name Description
-ing -ing
DT90123 Not used - N/A N/A
COM1 SEND/RECV For details, refer to Programming Manual
DT90124 N/A N/A
instruction end code (F145 and F146).
COM2 SEND/RECV For details, refer to Programming Manual
DT90125 N/A N/A
instruction end code (F145 and F146).
Forced ON/OFF
DT90126 Used by the system N/A N/A
operating station display
DT90127
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90139
The number of times the receiving operation
DT90140
is performed.
The current interval between two receiving
DT90141
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum inerval between two receiving
DT90142
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two receiving
DT90143
MEWNET-W0 operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 status The number of times the sending operation is
DT90144
performed.
The current interval between two sending
DT90145
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum interval between two sending
DT90146
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two sending
DT90147
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The number of times the receiving operation
DT90148
is performed.
The current interval between two receiving
DT90149
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum inerval between two receiving
DT90150
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two receiving
DT90151
MEWNET-W0 operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 1 status The number of times the sending operation is
DT90152
performed.
The current interval between two sending
DT90153
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The minimum interval between two sending
DT90154
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
The maximum interval between two sending
DT90155
operations: value in the register x 2.5ms
Area used for measurement of receiving
DT90156
MEWNET-W0 interval.
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 status Area used for measurement of sending
DT90157
interval.
17-39
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Area used for measurement of receiving
DT90158
MEWNET-W0 interval.
A N/A
PC(PLC) link 1 status Area used for measurement of sending
DT90159
interval.
MEWNET-W0
DT90160 Stores the unit No. of PC(PLC) link 0. A N/A
PC(PLC) link 0 unit No.
MEWNET-W0
DT90161 PC(PLC) link 0 error Stores the error contents of PC(PLC) link 0. A N/A
flag
DT90162
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90169
Duplicated destination for PC(PLC) inter-link
DT90170
address
DT90171 Counts how many times a token is lost.
Counts how many times two or more tokens
DT90172
are detected.
DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost.
No. of times underfined commands have
DT90174
been received.
MEWNET-W0
No. of times sum check errors have occurred A N/A
DT90175 PC(PLC) link 0 status
during reception.
No. of times format errors have occurred in
DT90176
received data.
No. of times transmission errors have
DT90177
occurred.
DT90178 No. of times procedural errors have occurred.
No. of times overlapping parent units have
DT90179
occurred.
DT90180
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90189
DT90190 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90191 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90192 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90193 Not used - N/A N/A
DT90194
to Not used - N/A N/A
DT90218
17-40
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Unit No. (Station No.)
0: Unit No. (Station No.) 1 to 8,
DT90219 selection for DT90220 to A N/A
1: Unit No. (Station No.) 9 to 16
DT90251
System regis-
DT90220
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC)
System regis-
DT90221 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis- The contents of the system register settings
DT90222 (station)
ter 44 and 45 partaining to the PLC inter-link function for
No. 1 or 9
System regis- the various unit numbers are stored as
DT90223
ter 46 and 47 shown below.
System regis-
DT90224
ter 40 and 41 <Example>
PC(PLC)
System regis- When DT90219 is 0
DT90225 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis-
DT90226 (station)
ter 44 and 45
No. 2 or 10
System regis-
DT90227
ter 46 and 47
System regis-
DT90228
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC)
System regis-
DT90229 link
ter 42 and 43
Unit A N/A
System regis- • When the system register 46 in the home
DT90230 (station)
ter 44 and 45 unit is in the standard setting, the values in
No. 3 or 11
System regis- the home unit are copied in the system
DT90231
ter 46 and 47 registers 46 and 47.
System regis- When the system register 46 in the home
DT90232
ter 40 and 41 unit is in the reverse setting, the registers
PC(PLC)
System regis- 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the home
DT90233 link
ter 42 and 43 unit mentioned in the left column will be
Unit
System regis- changed to 50 to 55 and 57, and the
DT90234 (station)
ter 44 and 45 system register 46 will be set as it is.
No. 4 or 12
System regis- Also, the system registers 40 to 45
DT90235 corresponding to other units will be
ter 46 and 47
System regis- changed to the values which the received
DT90236 values are corrected, and the registers 46
ter 40 and 41
PC(PLC) and 57 in the home unit are set for the
System regis-
DT90237 link registers 46 and 47.
ter 42 and 43
Unit
System regis-
DT90238 (station)
ter 44 and 45
No. 5 or 13
System regis-
DT90239
ter 46 and 47
17-41
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
System regis- The contents of the system register
DT90240
ter 40 and 41 settings partaining to the PLC inter-link
PC(PLC) System regis-
function for the various unit numbers are
DT90241 link stored as shown below.
ter 42 and 43
Unit
(station) System regis- <Example> when DT90219 is 0.
DT90242
No. 6 or 14 ter 44 and 45
System regis-
DT90243
ter 46 and 47
System regis-
DT90244
ter 40 and 41
17-42
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Counting area for input (X0) or
DT90300 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
(X0, X1) of the main unit.
value
DT90301 area Higher words A A Note)
HSC-CH0
The target value is set when
DT90302 Target Lower words A A Note)
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed.
DT90303 area Higher words A A Note)
Note) Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 (DMV) instruction only.
Writing in the target value area is available by F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) instructions only.
17-43
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Counting area for input (X5) of A
DT90320 Elapsed Lower words A Note1)
the main unit.
value
A
DT90321 area Higher words A Note1)
HSC-CH5
The target value is set when A
DT90322 Target Lower words A Note1)
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed. A
DT90323 area Higher words A Note1)
Note1) Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 (DMV) instruction only.
Writing in the target value area is available by F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) instructions only.
Note2) Available for the FP-X Ry type only.
17-44
FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Counting area for input (X1) of A
DT90336 Elapsed Lower words A Note1)
the pulse I/O cassette.
value
A
DT90337 area Higher words A Note1)
HSC-CH9
Note2)
The target value is set when A
DT90338 Target Lower words A Note1)
instructions F166 (HC1S) and
value
F167 (HC1R) are executed. A
DT90339 area Higher words A Note1)
Note1) Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 (DMV) instruction only.
Writing in the target value area is available by F166 (HC1S) and F167 (HC1R) instructions only.
Note2) Available for the FP-X Tr type only.
17-45
FP-X Tr type FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Counting area for the pulse I/O
DT90348 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
CH0 (Y0, Y1).
value
DT90349 area Higher words A A Note)
17-46
FP-X Tr type FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
DT90370 HSC-CH0 When HSC control is executed A N/A
DT90371 HSC-CH1 by F0 (MV)S, DT90052 A N/A
DT90372 HSC-CH2 instruction, the setting value for A N/A
DT90373 HSC-CH3 the target CH is stored in each A N/A
DT90374 HSC-CH4 CH. A N/A
DT90375 HSC-CH5 A N/A
DT90376 Control flag monitor HSC-CH6 A N/A
DT90377 area HSC-CH7 A N/A
DT90378
DT90379
DT90380 PLS-CH0 A N/A
DT90381 PLS-CH1 A N/A
DT90382 PLS-CH2 A N/A
DT90383 PLS-CH3 A N/A
Note) Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 (DMV) instruction only.
Writing in the target value area is available by F171 (SPDH), F172 (PLSH), F174 (SP0H) and
F175 (SPSH) instructions only.
17-47
FP-X Ry type FP-X (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Read- Writ-
Address Name Description
ing ing
Counting area for output
DT90348 Elapsed Lower words A A Note)
(Y100, Y101) of the pulse I/O
value
cassette.
DT90349 area Higher words A A Note)
17-48
17-49
17.2 Table of Basic Instructions
Steps
Name Boolean Symbol Description Note1)
AND Not AN/ Connects a Form B (normally closed) contact serially. 1 (2)
Leading ST↑ Begins a logic operation only for one scan when the 2
edge start leading edge of the trigger is detected.
Trailing edge ST↓ Begins a logic operation only for one scan when the trailing 2
start edge of the trigger is detected.
Note1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when using X1280, Y1280, R1120 (special internal relay included),
L1280, T256, C256 or anything beyond for the ST, ST/, OT, AN, AN/, OR and OR/ instructions,
the number of steps is shown in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a relay
number has an index modifier, the number of steps is shown in parentheses.
17-50
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
Start Not A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Out A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Not A A A A A A A A A A A A A
AND A A A A A A A A A A A A A
AND Not A A A A A A A A A A A A A
OR A A A A A A A A A A A A A
OR Not A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Leading N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
edge start N/A
Note2)
Trailing edge N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
start N/A
Note2)
17-51
Steps
Name Boolean Symbol Description Note1)
Read stack RDS Reads the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction. 1
Pop stack POPS Reads and clears the operated result stored by the PSHS 1
instruction
Leading DF Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading 1
edge edge of the trigger is detected.
differential
Trailing edge DF/ Turns on the contact for only one scan when the trailing 1
differential edge of the trigger is detected.
Note1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when using X1280, Y1280, R1120 (special internal relay included),
L1280, T256, C256 or anything beyond for the ST, ST/, OT, AN, AN/, OR and OR/ instructions,
the number of steps is shown in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a relay
number has an index modifier, the number of steps is shown in parentheses.
17-52
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
Leading N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
edge AND N/A
Note2)
Trailing edge N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
AND N/A
Note2)
Leading N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
edge OR N/A
Note2)
Trailing edge N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
OR N/A
Note2)
Leading N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
edge out
Trailing edge N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
out
Alternative N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
out
AND stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A
OR stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Push stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Note3)
Read stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Pop stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Note3)
Leading A A A A A A A A A A A A A
edge
differential
Trailing edge A A A A A A A A A A A A A
differential
17-53
Steps
Name Boolean Symbol Description Note1)
Leading DFI Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading 1
edge differ- edge of the trigger is detected. The leading edge detection
ential (initial is possible on the first scan.
execution
type)
Set SET Output is set to and held at on. 3
Keep KP Outputs at set trigger and holds until reset trigger turns on. 1 (2)
Note1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when using Y1280, R1120 (special internal relay included), L1280 or
anything beyond for the KP instruction, the number of steps is shown in parentheses. Also, in the
FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a relay number has an index modifier, the number of steps is shown
in parentheses.
17-54
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
Reset A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Keep A A A A A A A A A A A A A
No operation A A A A A A A A A A A A A
17-55
Steps
Name Boolean Symbol Description Note1)
TMR After set value “n” x 0.01 seconds, timer contact “a” is set 3 (4)
to on.
TMX After set value “n” x 0.1 seconds, timer contact “a” is set to 3 (4)
on.
TMY After set value “n” x 1 second, timer contact “a” is set to on. 4 (5)
Auxiliary F137 After set value “S” x 0.01 seconds, the specified output and 5
timer (16-bit) (STMR) R900D are set to on.
Auxiliary F183 After set value “S” x 0.01 seconds, the specified output and 7
timer (32-bit) (DSTM) R900D are set to on.
Time F182 Executes the filter processing for the specified input. 9
constant
processing
Counter CT Decrements from the preset value “n” 3 (4)
UP/DOWN F118 Increments or decrements from the preset value “S” based 5
counter (UDC) on up/donw input.
Note1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when timer 256 or higher, or counter 255 or lower, is used, the
number of steps is the number in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when a timer
number or counter number has an index modifier, the number of steps is the number in
parentheses.
17-56
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
UP/DOWN A A A A A A A A A A A A A
counter
17-57
Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps
Shift register SR Shifts one bit of 16-bit [word internal relay (WR)] data to 1 (2)
Note1)
the left.
Left/right F119 Shifts one bit of 16-bit data range specified by “D1” and 5
shift register (LRSR) “D2” to the left or to the right.
Control instructions
Master MC Starts the master control program. 2
control relay
Jump JP The program jumps to the label instruction and continues 2 (3)
Note2)
from there.
Label LBL 1
Auxiliary F19 The program jumps to the label instruction specified by “S” 3
jump (SJP) and continues from there.
Label LBL 1
*1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when internal relay WR240 or higher is used, the number of steps is the
number in parentheses. Also, in the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the specified internal relay number
(word address) has an index modifier, the number of steps is the number in parentheses.
*2) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” in a jump instruction has an index modifier, the
number of steps is the number in parentheses.
17-58
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
Shift register A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Left/right A A A A A A A A A A A A A
shift register
Control instructions
Master A A A A A A A A A A A A A
control relay
Master A A A A A A A A A A A A A
control relay
end
Jump A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Label
Auxiliary N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
jump
Label
17-59
Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps
Loop LOOP The program jumps to the label instruction and continues 4 (5)
Note1)
from there (the number of jumps is set in “S”).
Label LBL 1
Next step NSTL Start the specified process “n” and clear the process 3
currently started. (Scan execution type)
NSTP Start the specified process “n” and clear the process 3
currently started. (Pulse execution type)
Clear step CSTP Resets the specified process “n”. 3
Clear multi- SCLR Resets multiple processes specified by “n1” and “n2”. 5
ple steps
Step end STPE End of step ladder area 1
Note1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” in a loop instruction has an index modifier, the
number of steps is the number in parentheses.
17-60
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
Loop A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Label
Break N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
End A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Conditional A A A A A A A A A A A A A
end
Eject N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
Next step A A A A A A A A A A A A A
NSTL
Next step A A A A A A A A A A A A A
NSTP
Clear step A A A A A A A A A A A A A
17-61
Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps
Subroutine instructions
Subroutine CALL Executes the specified subroutine. When returning to the 2 (3)
Note1)
call main program, outputs in the subroutine program are
maintained.
Output off FCAL Executes the specified subroutine. When returning to the 4 (5)
Note1)
type subrou- main program, all outputs in the subroutine program are
tine call set to off.
Subroutine SUB Indicates the start of the subroutine program “n”. 1
entry
Interrupt instructions
Interrupt INT Indicates the start of the interrupt program “n”. 1
Note1) In the FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH, when the number “n” of a subroutine program has an index modifier,
the number of steps is the number in paretheses.
17-62
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
Subroutine instructions
Subroutine A A A A A A A A A A A A A
call
Output off N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A
type subrou-
tine call
Subroutine A A A A A A A A A A A A A
entry
Subroutine A A A A A A A A A A A A A
return
Interrupt instructions
Interrupt A A A A N/A A A A A A A A A
Interrupt A A A A N/A A A A A A A A A
return
17-63
Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps
PLC link Set the system setting time when a PLC link is used, based
time setting on the contents specified by the character constant.
17-64
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
Password N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note2)
setting
Interrupt N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
setting
PLC link N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
time setting
MEWTOCOL N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
-COM
response
control
High-speed N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
counter
operation
mode
changing
System N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
registers
“No. 40 to
No. 47”
changing
Note1) With FP-X Ver2.0 or later and FPsigma Ver3.10 or later, the baud rate can be selected from 300,
600 or 1200 bps.
Note2) With FPsigma 32k type, the 8-digit password can be selected.
17-65
Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps
17-66
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
17-67
Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps
17-68
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
17-69
Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps
17-70
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
17-71
Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps
32-bit data STD= Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32-bit data in 9
compare the comparative condition “(S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)”.
(Start)
17-72
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
17-73
Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps
17-74
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
17-75
Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps
17-76
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
17-77
Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps
17-78
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
Floating point N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
type real N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
number data
compare
(Start)
STF=
Floating point N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
type real N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
number data
compare
(Start)
STF<>
Floating point N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
type real N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
number data
compare
(Start)
STF>
Floating point N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
type real N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
number data
compare
(Start)
STF>=
Floating point N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
type real N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
number data
compare
(Start)
STF<
Floating point N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
type real N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
number data
compare
(Start)
STF<=
17-79
Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps
17-80
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(AND)
ANF=
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(AND)
ANF<>
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(AND)
ANF>
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(AND)
ANF>=
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(AND)
ANF<
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(AND)
ANF<=
17-81
Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps
17-82
Availability
FP1 FP-M
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(OR)
ORF=
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(OR)
ORF<>
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(OR)
ORF>
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(OR)
ORF>=
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(OR)
ORF<
Floating N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly Partly
point type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
real number
data compare
(OR)
ORF<=
17-83
17.3 Table of High-level Instructions
The high-level instructions are expressed by the prefixes “F” or “P” with numbers. For most of the high-
level instructions, “F” and “P” types are available. The differences between the two types are explained
as follows:
• Instructions with the prefix “F” are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on.
• Instructions with the prefix “P” are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected.
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
17-84
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P3
F4 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly N/A
P4 N/A N/A
Note2) Note2)
F5 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P5
F6 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P6
17-85
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
F11 Block copy COPY S, D1, D2 The data of “S” is transferred to the all area 7
P11 PCOPY between “D1” and “D2”.
F12 Data read ICRD S1, S2, D The data stored in the expansion memory of the IC 11
P12 from IC PICRD card or ROM specified by “S1” and “S2” are
F12 card/ROM ICRD transferred to the area startign at “D”.
F13 Data write to ICWT S1, S2, D The data specified by “S1” and “S2” are transferred 11
P13 IC card/ROM PICWT to the IC card expansion memory area or ROM
P13 PICWT starting at “D”.
F14 Program PGRD S The program specified using “S” is transferred into 3
P14 read from IC PPGRD the CPU from IC memory card and executes it.
memory card
F15 16-bit data XCH D1, D2 (D1)→(D2), (D2)→(D1) 5
P15 exchange PXCH
F16 32-bit data DXCH D1, D2 (D1+1, D1)→(D2+1, D2) 5
P16 exchange PDXCH (D2+1, D2)→(D1+1, D1)
F17 Higher/lower SWAP D The higher byte and lower byte of “D” are 3
P17 byte in 16-bit PSWAP exchanged.
data
exchange
F18 16-bit data BXCH D1, D2, D3 Exchange the data between “D1” and “D2” with the 7
P18 block PBXCH data specified by “D3”.
exchange
Control instruction
F19 Auxiliary SJP S The program jumps to the label instruction specified 3
jump by “S” and continues from there.
Binary arithmetic instructions
F20 16-bit data + S, D (D)+(S)→(D) 5
P20 addition P+
F21 32-bit data D+ S, D (D+1, D)+(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 7
P21 addition PD+
F22 16-bit data + S1, S2, D (S1)+(S2)→(D) 7
P22 addition P+
17-86
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F11 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P11
F12 - - - - N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A
P12
F12 A A A A
F14 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A
P14
F15 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P15
F16 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P16
F17 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P17
Control instruction
F19 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
17-87
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
17-88
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F23 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P23
F25 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P25
F26 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P26
F27 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P27
F28 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P28
F30 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P30
F31 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
P31
F32 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P32
F35 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P35
F36 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P36
17-89
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
17-90
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F37 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P37
F38 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P38
F39 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P39
F41 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P41
F42 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P42
F43 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P43
F45 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P45
F46 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P46
F47 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P47
17-91
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
17-92
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F48 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P48
F50 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P50
F52 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P52
F55 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P55
F56 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P56
F57 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P57
F58 A A A A A A A N/A A A A A A
P58
17-93
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
17-94
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F61 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P61
F62 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P62
F63 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P63
17-95
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
17-96
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
17-97
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
F78 ASCII code DABI S1, S2, D Converts the ASCII code specified by “S1” and 11
P78 → 32-bit PDABI “S2” to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in (D+1,
binary data D).
F80 16-bit binary BCD S, D Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by “S” 5
P80 data → PBCD to four digits of BCD data and stores it in “D”.
4-digit BCD Example: K100 → H100
data
F81 4-digit BCD BIN S, D Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by 5
P81 data → 16-bit PBIN “S” to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in “D”.
binary data Example: H100 → K100
F82 32-bit binary DBCD S, D Converts the 32 bits of binary data specified by 7
P82 data → PDBCD (S+1, S) to eight digits of BCD data and stores it in
8-digit BCD (D+1, D).
data
F83 8-digit BCD DBIN S, D Converts the eight digits of BCD data specified by 7
P83 data → 32-bit PDBIN (S+1, S) to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in
binary data (D+1, D).
F84 16-bit data INV D Inverts each bit of data of “D”. 3
P84 invert (com- PINV
plement of 1)
F85 16-bit data NEG D Inverts each bit of data of “D” and adds 1 (inverts 3
P85 complement PNEG the sign).
of 2
F86 32-bit data DNEG D Inverts each bit of data of (D+1, D) and adds 1 3
P86 complement PDNEG (inverts the sign).
of 2
F87 16-bit data ABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of “D”. 3
P87 absolute PABS
17-98
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F80 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P80
F81 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P81
F82 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P82
F83 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P83
F84 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P84
F85 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P85
F86 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P86
F87 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P87
17-99
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
F88 32-bit data DABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of (D+1, D). 3
P88 absolute PDABS
F89 16-bit data EXT D Extends the 16 bits of data in “D” to 32 bits in (D+1, 3
P89 sign PEXT D).
extension
F90 Decode DECO S, n, D Decodes part of the data of “S” and stores it in “D”. 7
P90 PDECO The part is specified by “n”.
F91 7-segment SEGT S, D Converts the data of “S” for use in a 7-segment 5
P91 decode PSEGT display and stores it in (D+1, D).
F92 Encode ENCO S, n, D Encodes part of the data of “S” and stores it in “D”. 7
P92 PENCO The part is specified by “n”.
F93 16-bit data UNIT S, n, D The least significant digit of each of the “n” words 7
P93 combine PUNIT of data beginning at “S” are stored (united) in order
in “D”.
F94 16-bit data DIST S, n, D Each of the digits of the data of “S” are stored in 7
P94 distribute PDIST (distriuted to) the least significant digits of the areas
beginning at “D”.
F95 Character→ ASC S, D Twelve characters of the characer constants of “S” 15
P95 ASCII code PASC are converted to ASCII code and stored in “D” to
“D+5”.
F96 16-bit table SRC S1, S2, S3 The data of “S1” is searched for in the areas in the 7
P96 data search PSRC range “S2” to “S3” and the result is stored in
DT9037 and DT9038 for FP0/FP-e/FP1/FP-M/FP3
and DT90037 and DT90038 for FP0 T32/FPΣ/
FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH.
F97 32-bit table DSRC S1, S2, S3 The data of (S1+1, S1) is searched for in the 32-bit 11
P97 data search PDSRC data designated by “S3”, beginning from “S2”, and
the result if stored in DT90037 and DT90038.
Data shift instructions
F98 Data table CMPR D1, D2, D3 Transfer “D2” to “D3”. Any parts of the data 7
P98 shift-out and PCMPR between “D1” and “D2” that are 0 are compressed,
compress and shifted in order toward “D2”.
17-100
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F88 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P88
F89 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P89
F90 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P90
F91 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P91
F92 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P92
F93 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P93
F94 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P94
F96 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P96
17-101
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
F99 Data table CMPW S, D1, D2 Transfer “S” to “D1”. Any parts of the data between 7
P99 shift-in and PCMPW “D1” and “D2” that are 0 are compressed, and
compress shifted in order toward “D2”.
F100 Right shift of SHR D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” to the right. 5
P100 multiple bits PSHR
(n bits) in a
16-bit data
F101 Left shift of SHL D, n Shifts the “n” bits of “D” to the left. 5
P101 multiple bits PSHL
(n bits) in a
16-bit data
F102 Right shift of DSHR D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 32-bit data area specified 5
P102 n bits in a 32- PDSHR by (D+1, D) to the right.
bit data
F103 Left shift of n DSHL D, n Shifts the “n” bits of the 32-bit data area specified 5
P103 bits in a 32- PDSHL by (D+1, D) to the left.
bit data
F105 Right shift of BSR D Shifts the one digit of data of “D” to the right. 3
P105 one hexade- PBSR
cimal digit
(4-bit)
F106 Left shift of BSL D Shifts the one digit of data of “D” to the left. 3
P106 one hexade- PBSL
cimal digit
(4-bit)
F108 Right shift of BITR D1, D2, n Shifts the “n” bits of data range by “D1” and “D2” to 7
P108 multiple bits PBITR the right.
(n bits)
F109 Left shift of BITL D1, D2, n Shifts the “n” bits of data range by “D1” and “D2” to 7
P109 multiple bits PBITL the left.
(n bits)
F110 Right shift of WSHR D1, D2 Shifts the one word of the areas by “D1” and “D2” 5
P110 one word PWSHR to the right.
(16-bit)
F111 Left shift of WSHL D1, D2 Shifts the one word of the areas by “D1” and “D2” 5
P111 one word PWSHL to the left.
(16-bit)
F112 Right shift of WBSR D1, D2 Shifts the one digit of the areas by “D1” and “D2” to 5
P112 one hexade- PWBSR the right.
cimal digit
(4-bit)
17-102
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F100 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P100
F101 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P101
F105 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P105
F106 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P106
F110 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P110
F111 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P111
F112 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P112
17-103
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
F113 Left shift of WBSL D1, D2 Shifts the one digit of the areas by “D1” and “D2” to 5
P113 one hexade- PWBSL the left.
cimal digit
(4-bit)
FIFO instructions
F115 FIFO buffer FIFT n, D The “n” words beginning from “D” are defined in the 5
P115 define PFIFT buffer.
F116 Data read FIFR S, D The oldest data beginning from “S” that was written 5
P116 from FIFO PFIFR to the buffer is read and stored in “D”.
buffer
F117 Data write FIFW S, D The data of “S” is written to the buffer starting from 5
P117 into FIFO PFIFW “D”.
buffer
Basic function instructions
F118 UP/DOWN UDC S, D Counts up or down from the value preset in “S” and 5
counter stores the elapsed value in “D”.
F119 Left/right LRSR D1, D2 Shifts one bit to the left or right with the area 5
shift register between “D1” and “D2” as the register.
Data rotate instructions
F120 16-bit data ROR D, n Rotate the “n” bits in data of “D” to the right. 5
P120 right rotate PROR
F121 16-bit data ROL D, n Rotate the “n” bits in data of “D” to the left. 5
P121 left rotate PROL
F122 16-bit data RCR D, n Rotate the “n” bits in 17-bit area consisting of “D” 5
P122 right rotate PRCR plus the carry flag (R9009) data to the right.
with carry
flag (R9009)
data
F123 16-bit data RCL D, n Rotate the “n” bits in 17-bit area consisting of “D” 5
P123 left rotate PRCL plus the carry flag (R9009) data to the left.
with carry
flag (R9009)
data
17-104
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F113 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P113
FIFO instructions
F115 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P115
F116 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P116
F119 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
F123 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P123
17-105
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
F125 32-bit data DROR D, n Rotate the number of bits specified by “n” of the 5
P125 right rotate PDROR double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to
the right.
F126 32-bit data DROL D, n Rotate the number of bits specified by “n” of the 5
P126 left rotate PDROL double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to
the left.
F127 32-bit data DRCR D, n Rotate the number of bits specified by “n” of the 5
P127 right rotate PDRCR double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to
with carry the right together with carry flag (R9009) data.
flag (R9009)
data
F128 32-bit data DRCL D, n Rotate the number of bits specified by “n” of the 5
P128 left rotate PDRCL double words data (32 bits) specified by (D+1, D) to
with carry the left together with carry flag (R9009) data.
flag (R9009)
data
Bit manipulation instructions
F130 16-bit data bit BTS D, n Set the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D” to 5
P130 set PBTS 1.
F131 16-bit data bit BTR D, n Set the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D” to 5
P131 reset PBTR 0.
F132 16-bit data BTI D, n Invert the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D”. 5
P132 invert PBTI
F133 16-bit data bit BTT D, n Test the value of bit position “n” of the data of “D” 5
P133 test PBTT and output the result to R900B.
F135 Number of on BCU S, D Store the number of on bits in the data of “S” in “D”. 5
P135 (1) bits in PBCU
16-bit data
F136 Number of on DBCU S, D Store the number of on bits in the data of (S+1, S) 7
P136 (1) bits in PDBCU in “D”.
32-bit data
17-106
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F136 A A A A A A A A A A A A A
P136
17-107
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
17-108
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
Special instructions
F138 Partly A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
P138 N/A
Note2)
17-109
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
F142 Watching WDT S The time (allowable scan time for the system) of 3
P142 dog timer PWDT watching dog timer is changed to “S” × 0.1 (ms) for
update that scan.
F143 Partial I/O IORF D1, D2 Updates the I/O from the number specified by “D1” 5
P143 update PIORF to the number specified by “D2”.
F144 Serial data TRNS S, n The COM port received flag (R9038) is set to off to 5
communica- enable reception.
tion control Beginning at “S”, “n” bytes of the data registers are
sent from the COM port.
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, D, N Sends the data to another station in the network 9
P145 PSEND (MEWNET).
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, N, D Receives the data to another station in the network 9
P146 PRECV (MEWNET).
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, D, N Sends the data to the slave station as the MOD 9
P145 bus master.
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, N, D Receives the data from the slave station as the 9
P146 MOD bus master.
F145 Data send SEND S1, S2, D, N Sends the data to the slave station as the 9
P145 MEWTOCOL master.
F146 Data receive RECV S1, S2, N, D Receives the data from the slave station as the 9
P146 MEWTOCOL master.
F147 Printout PR S, D Converts the ASCII code data in the area starting 5
with “S” for printing, and outputs it to the word
external output relay WY specified by “D”.
F148 Self- ERR n Stores the self-diagnostic error number “n” in 3
P148 diagnostic PERR (n: k100 to (DT9000 for FP0/FP-e/FP1/FP-M/FP3 or DT90000
error set K299) for FP0 T32/FPΣ/FP2/FP2SH/FP10SH), turns
R9000 on, and turns on the ERROR LED.
17-110
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F142 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A
P142
F143 A A A A N/A A A A A A A A A
P143
F144 A N/A A A N/A A A N/A A N/A A A A
F145 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P145
F146 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P146
F145 N/A Partly A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
P145 N/A
Note2)
F146 N/A Partly A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
P146 N/A
Note2)
F145 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
P145 N/A N/A
Note2) Note2)
F146 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
P146 N/A N/A
Note2) Note2)
17-111
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
F156 Sampling STRG - When the trigger of this instruction turns on, the 1
P156 trigger PSTRG sampling trace stops.
F157 Time addition CADD S1, S2, D The time after (S2+1, S2) elapses from the time of 9
P157 PCADD (S1+2, S1+1, S1) is stored in (D+2, D+1, D).
F158 Time CSUB S1, S2, D The time that results from subtracting (S2+1, S2) 9
P158 substruction PCSUB from the time (S1+2, S1+1, S1) is stored in (D+2,
D+1, D).
F159 Serial port MTRN S, n, D This is used to send data to an external device 7
P159 communica- PMTRN through the specified CPU COM port or MCU COM
tion port.
F161 MCU serial MRCV S, D1, D2 Data is received from external equipment via the 7
P161 port PMRCV COM port of the specified MCU.
reception
17-112
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F149 A A A A N/A A A N/A A A A A A
P149
F150 N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P150 N/A
Note2)
F151 N/A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P151 N/A
Note2)
F152 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P152
F153 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P153
F154 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A N/A N/A
P154
F155 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P155 N/A N/A
Note6) Note5)
F156 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A A
P156 N/A N/A
Note6) Note5)
F159 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly N/A
P159 N/A N/A
Note4 Note4
F161 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly N/A
P161 N/A N/A
Note4 Note4
17-113
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
In versions prior to CPU Ver. 2.7, the range is fixed at 360 Hz to 5 kHz.
In Ver. 2.7 or later but prior to CPU Ver. 2.9, switching is possible among 4 ranges (360 Hz to 5 kHz/180
Hz to 5 kHz/90 Hz to 5 kHz/45 Hz to 5 kHz).
In CPU Ver. 2.9 and later versions, switching is possible among 6 ranges.
17-114
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F165 N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A
17-115
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
17-116
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F167 A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
F168 A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
F169 A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
F170 A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
17-117
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
F174 Pulse output SP0H S, n Outputs the pulses from the specified channel 5
(with channel according to the data table specified by S.
specification)
(Selectable
data table
control
operation )
F175 Pulse output SPSH S, n Pulses are output from channel, in accordance with 5
(Linear the designated data table, so that the path to the
interpolation) target position forms a straight line.
F176 Pulse output SPCH S, n Pulses are output from channel, in accordance with 5
(Circular the designated data table, so that the path to the
interpolation) target position forms an arc.
17-118
Availability (A: Available, N/A: Not available)
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F1 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
F166 A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
F167 A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
F171 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
F172 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
F173 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
F174 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
F175 N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
F176 N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note3)
Note1) For the FP0/FPΣ/FP-X/FP1/FP-M, the P type high-level instructions are not available.
Note2) The elapsed value area differs depending on used channels.
Note3) This instruction is available for FPΣ C32T2,C28T2,C32T2H and C28T2H.
17-119
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
17-120
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F181 N/A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
F231 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly N/A
P231 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note3) Note6) Note2 Note2
17-121
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
F235 16-bit binary GRY S, D Converts the 16-bit binary data of “S” to gray 6
P235 data → Gray PGRY codes, and the converted result is stored in the “D”.
code
conversion
F236 32-bit binary DGRY S, D Converts the 32-bit binary data of (S+1, S) to gray 8
P236 data → Gray PDGRY code, and the converted result is stored in the
code (D+1, D).
conversion
F237 16-bit gray GBIN S, D Converts the gray codes of “S” to binary data, and 6
P237 code → PGBIN the converted result is stored in the “D”.
binary data
conversion
F238 32-bit gray DGBIN S, D Converts the gray codes of (S+1, S) to binary data, 8
P238 code → PDGBIN and the converted result is stored in the (D+1, D).
binary data
conversion
F240 Bit line to bit COLM S, n, D The values of bits 0 to 15 of “S” are stored in bit “n” 8
P240 column PCOLM of (D to DC+15).
conversion
F241 Bit column to LINE S, n, D The values of bit “n” of (S) to (S+15) are stored in 8
P241 bit line PLINE bits 0 to 15 of “D”.
conversion
F250 Binary data BTOA S1, S2, n, D Converts multiple binary data to multiple ASCII 12
→ ASCII data.
conversion
F251 ASCII → ATOB S1, S2, n, D Converts multiple ASCII data to multiple binary 12
binary data data.
conversion
F252 ASCII data ACHK S1, S2, n Checks the ASCII data strings to be used in F251 10
check (ATOB) instruction.
17-122
Availability A: Available, N/A: Not available
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F235 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P235
F250 N/A Partly A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A
Note2
F251 N/A Partly A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A
Note2
F252 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A N/A
Note4) Note3)
17-123
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
F262 Retrieving LEFT S1, S2, D These instructions retrieve a specified number of 8
P262 data from characters from the left side of the character string.
character
strings (left
side)
F263 Retrieving a MIDR S1, S2, S3, These instructions retrieve a character string 10
P263 character D consisting of a specified number of characters from
string from a the specified position in the character string.
character
string
F264 Writing a MIDW S1, S2, D, These instructions write a specified number of 12
P264 character n characters from a character string to a specified
string to a position in the character string.
character
string
F265 Replacing SREP S, D, p, n A specified number of characters in a character 12
P265 character string are rewritten, starting from a specified
strings position in the character string.
Integer type data processing instructions
F270 Maximum MAX S1, S2, D Searches the maximum value in the word data 8
P270 value (word PMAX table between the “S1” and “S2”, and stores it in
data (16-bit)) the “D”. The address relative to “S1” is stored in
“D+1”.
F271 Maximum DMAX S1, S2, D Searches for the maximum value in the double 8
P271 value (double PDMAX word data table between the area selected with
word data “S1” and “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The address
(32-bit)) relative to “S1” is stored in “D+2”.
F272 Minimum MIN S1, S2, D Searches for the minimum value in the word data 8
P272 value (word PMIN table between the area selected with “S1” and “S2”,
data (16-bit)) and stores it in the “D”. The address relative to “S1”
is stored in “D+1”.
F273 Minimum DMIN S1, S2, D Searches for the minimum value in the double word 8
P273 value (double PDMIN data table between the area selected with “S1” and
word data “S2”, and stores it in the “D”. The address relative
(32-bit)) to “S1” is stored in “D+2”.
F275 Total and MEAN S1, S2, D The total value and the mean value of the word 8
P275 mean values PMEAN data with sign from the area selected with “S1” to
(word data “S2” are obtained and stored in the “D”.
(16-bit))
F276 Total and DMEAN S1, S2, D The total value and the mean value of the double 8
P276 mean values PDMEAN word data with sign from the area selected with
(double word “S1” to “S2” are obtained and stored in the “D”.
data (32-bit))
17-124
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F262 N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P262
17-125
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
F277 Sort (word SORT S1, S2, S3 The word data with sign from the area specified by 8
P277 data (16-bit)) PSORT “S1” to “S2” are sorted in ascending order (the
smallest word is first) or descending order (the
largest word is first).
F278 Sort (double DSORT S1, S2, S3 The double word data with sign from the area 8
P278 word data PDSORT specified b “S1” ato “S2” are sorted in ascending
(32-bit)) order (the smallest word is first) or descending
order (the largest word is first).
F282 Scaling of SCAL S1, S2, D The toutptu value Y is found for the input value X 8
P282 16-bit data PSCAL by performing scaling for the given data table.
F283 Scaling of DSCAL S1, S2, D The toutptu value Y is found for the input value X 10
P283 32-bit data PDSCAL by performing scaling for the given data table.
F284 Inclination RAMP S1, S2, S3, Executes the linear output for the specified time 10
P284 output of 16- D from the specified initial value to the target value.
bit data
Integer type non-linear function instructions
F285 Upper and LIMT S1, S2, S3, When S1>S3, S1→D 10
P285 lower limit PLIMT D When S1<S3, S2→D
control When S1<or = S3<or = S2, S3→D
(16-bit data)
F286 Upper and DLIMT S1, S2, S3, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S1+1, S1) 16
P286 lower limit PDLIMT D →(D+1, D)
control When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S2+1, S2)
(32-bit data) →(D+1, D)
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or = (S2+1, S2),
(S3+1, S3)→(D+1, D)
F287 Deadband BAND S1, S2, S3, When S1>S3, S3−S1→D 10
P287 control PBAND D When S2<S3, S3−S2→D
(16-bit data) When S1<or = S3<or = S2, 0→D
F288 Deadband DBAND S1, S2, S3, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S3+1, S3)−(S1+1, 16
P288 control PDBAND D S1)→(D+1, D)
(32-bit data) When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S3+1, S3)−(S2+1,
S2)→(D+1, D)
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or = (S2+1,
S2),0→(D+1, D)
F289 Zone control ZONE S1, S2, S3, When S3<0, S3+S1→D 10
P289 (16-bit data) PZONE D When S3=0, 0→D
When S3>0, S3+S2→D
F290 Zone control DZONE S1, S2, S3, When (S3+1, S3)<0, (S3+1, S3)+(S1+1, S1) 16
P290 (32-bit data) PDZONE D →(D+1, D)
When (S3+1, S3)=0, 0→(D+1, D)
When (S3+1, S3)>0, (S3+1, S3)+(S2+1, S2)
→(D+1, D)
17-126
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F277 N/A A A Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P277 N/A
Note2)
17-127
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
17-128
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F301 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P301
F302 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P302
F303 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P303
F304 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P304
F305 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P305
17-129
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
17-130
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
17-131
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
-1
F319 Floating- ATAN S, D TAN (S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10
P319 point type PATAN
data
arctangent
operation
F320 Floating- LN S, D LN(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10
P320 point type PLN
data natural
logarithm
F321 Floating- EXP S, D EXP(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10
P321 point type PEXP
data
exponent
F322 Floating- LOG S, D LOG(S+1, S)→(D+1, D) 10
P322 point type PLOG
data
logarithm
F323 Floating- PWR S1, S2, D (S1+1, S1) ^ (S2+1, S2)→(D+1, D) 14
P323 point type PPWR
data power
F324 Floating- FSQR S, D 10
√(S+1, S)→(D+1, D)
P324 point type PFSQR
data square
root
F325 16-bit integer FLT S, D Converts the 16-bit integer data with sign specified 6
P325 data to PFLT by “S” to real number data, and the converted data
floating-point is stored in “D”.
type data
conversion
F326 32-bit integer DFLT S, D Converts the 32-bit integer data with sign specified 8
P326 data to PDFLT by (S+1, S) to real number data, and the converted
floating-point data is stored in (D+1, D).
type data
conversion
17-132
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F319 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P319
17-133
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
17-134
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F327 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P327
17-135
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
17-136
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F331 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P331
17-137
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
F338 Floating- DEG S, D The angle data in radians (real number data) 8
P338 point type PDEG specified in (S+1, S) is converted to angle data in
data radian degrees, and the result is stored in (D+1, D).
→ degree
Floating-point type real number data processing instructions
F345 Floating- FCMP S1, S2 (S1+1, S1)>(S2+1, S2)→ R900A: on 10
P345 point type PFCMP (S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2)→ R900B on
data compare (S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→ R900C: on
F346 Floating- FWIN S1, S2, S3 (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3)→ R900A: on 14
P346 point type PFWIN (S2+1, S2)<or =(S1+1, S1)<or =(S3+1, S3)
data band → R900B on
compare (S1+1, S1)<(S2+1, S2)→ R900C: on
F347 Floating- FLIMT S1, S2, S3, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), (S1+1, S1) 17
P347 point type PFLIMT D →(D+1, D)
data upper When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3), (S2+1, S2)
and lower → (D+1, D)
limit control When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or =(S2+1, S2),
(S3+1, S3)→(D+1, D)
F348 Floating- FBAND S1, S2, S3, When (S1+1, S1)>(S3+1, S3), 17
P348 point type PFBAND D (S3+1, S3)−(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
data dead- When (S2+1, S2)<(S3+1, S3),
band control (S3+1, S3)−(S2+1, S2)→ (D+1, D)
When (S1+1, S1)<or = (S3+1, S3)<or =(S2+1, S2),
0.0→(D+1, D)
F349 Floating- FZONE S1, S2, S3, When (S3+1, S3)<0.0, 17
P349 point type PFZONE D (S3+1, S3)+(S1+1, S1)→(D+1, D)
data zone When (S3+1, S3)=0.0, 0.0→ (D+1, D)
control When (S3+1, S3)>0.0, (S3+1, S3)+(S2+1, S2)
→(D+1, D)
F350 Floating- FMAX S1, S2, D Searches the maximum value in the real number 8
P350 point type PFMAX data table between the area selected with “S1” and
data maxi- “S2”, and stores it in the (D+1, D). The address
mum value relative to “S1” is stored in (D+2).
17-138
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F338 A A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P338
F350 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P350
17-139
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
F351 Floating- FMIN S1, S2, D Searches the minimum value in the real number 8
P351 point type PFMIN data table between the area selected with “S1” and
data mini- “S2”, and stores it in the (D+1, D). The address
mum value relative to “S1” is stored in (D+2).
F352 Floating- FMEAN S1, S2, D The total value and the mean value of the real 8
P352 point type PFMEAN number data from the area selected with “S1” to
data total and “S2” are obtained. The total value is stored in the
mean values (D+1, D) and the mean value is stored in the (D+3,
D+2).
F353 Floating- FSORT S1, S2, S3 The real number data from the area speciified by 8
P353 point type PFSORT “S1” to “S2” are stored in ascending order (the
data sort smallest word is first) or descending order (the
largest word is first).
F354 Scaling of FSCAL S1, S2, D Scaling (linearization) on a real number data table 12
P354 real number PFSCAL is performed, and the output (Y) to an input value
data (X) is calculated.
Time series processing instruction
F355 PID PID S PID processing is performed depending on the 4
processing control value (mode and parameter) specified by (S
to S+2) and (S+4 to S+10), and the result is stored
in the (S+3).
F356 Eaay PID EZPID S1, S2, S3, Temperature control (PID) can be easily performed 10
S4 using the image of a temperautre controller.
Compare instructions
F373 16-bit data DTR S, D If the data in the 16-bit area specified by “S” has 6
P373 revision PDTR changed since the previous execution, internal
detection relay R9009 (carry flag) will turn on. “D” is used to
store the data of the previous execution.
F374 32-bit data DDTR S, D If the data in the 32-bit area specified by (S+1, S) 6
P374 revision PDDTR has changed since the previous execution, internal
detection relay R9009 (carry flag) will turn on. (D+1, D) is
used to store the data of the previous execution.
17-140
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F351 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P351
F352 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P352
F353 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P353
F354 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Partly Partly N/A
P354 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Note3) Note5) Note2) Note2)
F356 N/A Partly Partly N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A N/A
Note4) Note4)
Compare instructions
F373 N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P373
F374 N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A A
P374
17-141
Num-
Name Boolean Operand Description Steps
ber
17-142
Availability
Note1) Note1)
FP1 FP-M
Note1)
FP10SH
FP2SH
Name
FP-X
C14 C24 C56 C20
FP-e
Note1)
Note1)
FPΣ
FP0
FP3
FP2
C16
C16 C40 C72 C32
F411 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A
P411
F412 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A
P412
F415 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
P415
F416 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A N/A
P416
17-143
17.4 Table of Error codes
Difference in ERROR display
There are differences in the way errors are displayed depending on the model.
Model Display Display method
FP1,FP-M,FP2,FP3,FP10SH LED ERROR. Continually lit
FPΣ,FP0, FP-X LED ERROR/ALARM Flashes/contunually lit
FP-e Screen display ERR. Continually lit
When the “ERROR” on the control unit (CPU unit) turns on or flashes, a self-diagnostic error or syntax
check error has occurred. Confirm the contents of the error and take the appopriate steps.
17-144
-Self-diagnostic Error
This error occurs when the control unit (CPU unit) self-diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an
abnormality in the system. The self-diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection, I/O
abnomal detection, and other devices.
17-145
Table of Syntax Check Error
FP1/FP-M
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
FP3
status
17-146
FP1/FP-M
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
FP3
status
17-147
Table of Self-Diagnostic Error
FP1/FP-M
Opera-
FP10SH
Error
FP2SH
Name tion Description and steps to take
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
code
FP0
FP2
FP3
status
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
FP3
status
Configu-
A parameter error was detected in the
ration
E29 Stops MEWNET-W2 configuration area. Set A A
parameter a correct parameter.
error
Interrupt Probably a hardware abnormality.
E30 Stops ⇒ Please contact your dealer.
A
error 0
An interrupt occurred without an
interrupt request . A hardware problem
Interrupt
E31 Stops or error due to noise is possible. A A A A A A A A A
error 1 ⇒ Turn off the power and check the
noise conditions.
There is no interrupt program for an
interrupt which occurred.
Interrupt
E32 Stops ⇒ Check the number of the interrupt A A A A A A A A A
error 2 program and change it to agree with
the interrrupt request..
Multi-CPU This error occurs when a FP3/FP10SH
data CPU2 is used as CPU2 for a multi-CPU
E33 system.
A A
unmatch Stops
error ⇒Refer to “Multi-CPU system Manual”.
An abnormal unit is installed.
-FPΣ, FP-X, FP2,FP2SH and
FP10SH:
Check the contents of special data
register DT90036 and locate the
I/O status abnormal unit.Then turn off the power
E34 Stops and replace the unit with a new one.
A A A A A A
error
-FP3:
Check the contents of special data
register DT9036 and locate the
abnormal unit. Then turn off the power
and replace the unit with a new one.
MEWNET-F A unit, which cannot be installed on the
slave station of the MEWNET-F link
slave
E35 Stops system,is installed on the slave station. A A A A
illegal unit ⇒Remove the illegal unit from the
error slave station.
MEWNET-F The number of slots or I/O points used
(remore for MEWNET-F(remote I/O) system
exceeds the limitation.
E36 I/O) Stops ⇒Re-configure the system so that the
A A A A
limitation number of slots and I/O points is within
error the specified range.
MEWNET-F I/O overlap or I/O setting that is over
I/O the range is detected in the allocated
E37 Stops I/O and MEWNET-F I/O map.
A A A A
mapping
error ⇒Re-configure the I/O map correctly
A:Available
17-149
FP1/FP-M
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
FP3
status
17-150
FP1/FP-M
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
FP3
status
17-151
FP1/FP-M
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
FP3
status
17-152
FP1/FP-M
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
FP3
status
17-153
FP1/FP-M
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
FP3
status
17-154
FP1/FP-M
Opera-
Error
FP10SH
Name
FP2SH
tion Description and steps to take
code
FPΣ
FP-X
FP-e
FP0
FP2
FP3
status
17-155
Table of MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Error
Error
Name Description
code
17-156
Error
Name Description
code
17-157
17.5 MEWTOCOL-COM Communication Commands
Table of MEWTOCOL-COM commands
Command name Code Description
RC Reads the on and off status of contact.
(RCS) - Specifies only one point.
Read contact area
(RCP) - Specifies multiple contacts.
(RCC) - Specifies a range in word units.
WC Turns contacts on and off.
(WCS) - Specifies only one point.
Write contact area
(WCP) - Specifies multiple contacts.
(WCC) - Specifies a range in word units.
Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area.
Write data area WD Writes data to a data area.
Read timer/counter set value area RS Reads the value set for a timer/counter.
Write timer/counter set value area WS Writes a timer/counter setting value.
Read timer/counter ellapsed value area RK Reads the timer/counter elapsed value.
Write timer/counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer/counter elapsed value.
Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored.
Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored.
Monitors a registered contact or data using the
Monitoring start MG
code “MC or MD”.
Embeds the areaof a specified range in a 16-
Preset contact area (fill command) SC
point on and off pattern.
Writes the same contents to the data area of a
Preset data area (fill command) SD
specified range.
Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register.
Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register.
Reads the specifications of the programmable
Read the status of PLC RT
controller and error codes if an error occurs.
Switches the operation mode of the
Remote control RM
programmable controller.
Abort AB Aborts communication.
17-158
17.6 Hexadecimal/Binary/BCD
BCD data
Decimal Hexadecimal Binary data
(Binary Coded Decimal)
0 0000 00000000 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 0001 00000000 00000001 0000 0000 0000 0001
2 0002 00000000 00000010 0000 0000 0000 0010
3 0003 00000000 00000011 0000 0000 0000 0011
4 0004 00000000 00000100 0000 0000 0000 0100
5 0005 00000000 00000101 0000 0000 0000 0101
6 0006 00000000 00000110 0000 0000 0000 0110
7 0007 00000000 00000111 0000 0000 0000 0111
8 0008 00000000 00001000 0000 0000 0000 1000
9 0009 00000000 00001001 0000 0000 0000 1001
10 000A 00000000 00001010 0000 0000 0001 0000
11 000B 00000000 00001011 0000 0000 0001 0001
12 000C 00000000 00001100 0000 0000 0001 0010
13 000D 00000000 00001101 0000 0000 0001 0011
14 000E 00000000 00001110 0000 0000 0001 0100
15 000F 00000000 00001111 0000 0000 0001 0101
16 0010 00000000 00010000 0000 0000 0001 0110
17 0011 00000000 00010001 0000 0000 0001 0111
18 0012 00000000 00010010 0000 0000 0001 1000
19 0013 00000000 00010011 0000 0000 0001 1001
20 0014 00000000 00010100 0000 0000 0010 0000
21 0015 00000000 00010101 0000 0000 0010 0001
22 0016 00000000 00010110 0000 0000 0010 0010
23 0017 00000000 00010111 0000 0000 0010 0011
24 0018 00000000 00011000 0000 0000 0010 0100
25 0019 00000000 00011001 0000 0000 0010 0101
26 001A 00000000 00011010 0000 0000 0010 0110
27 001B 00000000 00011011 0000 0000 0010 0111
28 001C 00000000 00011100 0000 0000 0010 1000
29 001D 00000000 00011101 0000 0000 0010 1001
30 001E 00000000 00011110 0000 0000 0011 0000
31 001F 00000000 00011111 0000 0000 0011 0001
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
63 003F 00000000 00111111 0000 0000 0110 0011
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
255 00FF 00000000 11111111 0000 0010 0101 0101
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
9999 270F 00100111 00001111 1001 1001 1001 1001
17-159
17.7 ASCII Codes
17-160
Record of changes
Manual No. Date Desceiption of changes